115108461 otc107204 optix ng wdm configuration guide issue 1 00 (1)

250
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 V100 Configuration Guide Issue 21 Date 2009-08-10 Part Number

Upload: srotenstein3114

Post on 08-Apr-2016

88 views

Category:

Documents


10 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 V100

Configuration Guide Issue 21

Date 2009-08-10

Part Number

Page 2: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.2009. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Page 3: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide Contents

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 WDM Network Management Process....................................................................................1-1

2 Starting the T2000 ......................................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000............................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Starting the Computer ..........................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server ....................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status .......................................................................................................2-4 2.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client............................................................................................................2-4 2.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client .........................................................................................................................2-5 2.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server.........................................................................................................2-6 2.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer ..............................................................................................................2-7

2.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views .............................................................................................................2-7 2.2.1 Opening the Main Topology ................................................................................................................2-8 2.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer.....................................................................................................................2-8

2.3 How to Change the IP Address of the T2000 Server.....................................................................................2-8

3 Configuring IP over DCC.........................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................3-1 3.2 Basic Operations ...........................................................................................................................................3-2

3.2.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters...............................................................................................3-2 3.2.2 Configuring Static Routing ..................................................................................................................3-3

3.3 Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................3-4 3.4 Application Example .....................................................................................................................................3-4

3.4.1 Application 1: In Gateway NE Mode...................................................................................................3-5 3.4.2 Application 2: In Gateway NE Mode (by Default Gateway) ...............................................................3-5 3.4.3 Application 3: In Direct Connection Mode (by Static Routes) ............................................................3-8

4 Creating a Network....................................................................................................................4-1 4.1 Network Creation Procedure.........................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Creating NEs .................................................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Creating NEs in Batches ......................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.2 Creating a Single NE ...........................................................................................................................4-6

4.3 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack ...............................................................................................................4-8

Page 4: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

Contents OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4.3.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration ...................................................................................................4-8 4.3.2 Adding a Slave Subrack .......................................................................................................................4-8 4.3.3 Changing a Subrack Name...................................................................................................................4-9 4.3.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack .............................................................................................4-10 4.3.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack ...................................................................................................................4-10

4.4 Creating Optical NEs ..................................................................................................................................4-11 4.5 Creating an NE User ...................................................................................................................................4-11 4.6 Switching a Logged-In NE User .................................................................................................................4-13 4.7 Configuring the NE Data.............................................................................................................................4-14

4.7.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually ...................................................................................................4-14 4.7.2 Replicating the NE Data ....................................................................................................................4-15 4.7.3 Uploading the NE Data ......................................................................................................................4-16

4.8 Configuring Boards .....................................................................................................................................4-17 4.8.1 Adding Boards ...................................................................................................................................4-17 4.8.2 Checking Board Parameters...............................................................................................................4-18 4.8.3 Adding Ports ......................................................................................................................................4-28

4.9 Creating Fibers ............................................................................................................................................4-29 4.9.1 Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode....................................................................................4-29 4.9.2 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode ...................................................................................4-30 4.9.3 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode..........................................................................................4-32

4.10 Configuring NE Clock Sources.................................................................................................................4-33 4.10.1 Adding Clock Sources......................................................................................................................4-33 4.10.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE ..........................................................................4-34

4.11 Configuring Orderwire ..............................................................................................................................4-35 4.11.1 Setting the Orderwire Board ............................................................................................................4-35 4.11.2 Configuring Orderwire.....................................................................................................................4-36 4.11.3 Configuring Conference Calls..........................................................................................................4-37 4.11.4 Configuring Express Orderwire .......................................................................................................4-38 4.11.5 Dividing Orderwire Subnets.............................................................................................................4-39

4.12 Configuring the NE Time..........................................................................................................................4-40 4.12.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the T2000 and NEs..................................................................4-41 4.12.2 Synchronizing the NE Time with the T2000 Server Automatically .................................................4-41 4.12.3 Synchronizing the NE Time with the T2000 Server Manually ........................................................4-42 4.12.4 Configuring the Standard NTP Key .................................................................................................4-42 4.12.5 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time ...................................................4-43

4.13 Parameters .................................................................................................................................................4-44 4.13.1 Parameters: Laser Spectrum Analysis ..............................................................................................4-45 4.13.2 Parameters: Wavelength Monitoring Management ..........................................................................4-47 4.13.3 Parameters: Orderwire Board Settings.............................................................................................4-47 4.13.4 Parameters: General .........................................................................................................................4-48 4.13.5 Parameters: Conference Call............................................................................................................4-49 4.13.6 Parameters: Auxiliary.......................................................................................................................4-50

Page 5: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide Contents

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

4.13.7 Parameters: Attributes of NEs..........................................................................................................4-50 4.13.8 Parameters: Attributes of NE Users .................................................................................................4-52 4.13.9 Parameters: NE Time Synchronization ............................................................................................4-55 4.13.10 Parameters: Standard NTP Key Management ................................................................................4-58 4.13.11 Parameters: Path Binding ...............................................................................................................4-59

4.14 Parameters: WDM Interface......................................................................................................................4-59 4.14.1 Parameters: Optical Transponder Board ..........................................................................................4-61 4.14.2 Parameters: Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board..........................................................................4-69 4.14.3 Parameters: Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board .......................................................................4-71 4.14.4 Parameters: Tributary and Line Boards............................................................................................4-72 4.14.5 Parameters: Optical Amplifier Board...............................................................................................4-74 4.14.6 Parameters:Optical Supervisory Channel Board..............................................................................4-78 4.14.7 Parameters: Protection Board...........................................................................................................4-80 4.14.8 Parameters: Spectrum Analysis Board .............................................................................................4-81 4.14.9 Parameters: Variable Optical Attenuation Board..............................................................................4-82 4.14.10 Parameters: Dispersion Compensation Board................................................................................4-84

5 Performance Management .......................................................................................................5-1 5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold.....................................................................................................5-1 5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters ................................................................................................5-2

5.2.1 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board .....................................................................5-2 5.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE........................................................................5-3 5.2.3 Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port .................................................................5-4

5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers........................................................................................................5-5

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming ......................................................................................6-1 6.1 Basic Concepts ..............................................................................................................................................6-1 6.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow ..................................................................................................6-2 6.3 Configuring the ROADM..............................................................................................................................6-3

6.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................6-3 6.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation .................................................................................6-5 6.3.3 Configuration Process ..........................................................................................................................6-8

6.4 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................6-13 6.4.1 Parameters: Edge Port........................................................................................................................6-14 6.4.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection.......................................................................6-14 6.4.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection ........................................................................6-16

7 Configuring WDM Services.....................................................................................................7-1 7.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Service Type..................................................................................................................................................7-7 7.3 WDM Service Configuration Flow ...............................................................................................................7-9 7.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service ....................................................................7-11

7.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ..................................................................................................7-11 7.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation ...............................................................................7-12

Page 6: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

Contents OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

7.4.3 Configuration Process ........................................................................................................................7-13 7.5 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services ................................................................7-15

7.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ..................................................................................................7-16 7.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation ...............................................................................7-16 7.5.3 Configuration Process ........................................................................................................................7-17

7.6 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service .................................................................7-19 7.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ..................................................................................................7-20 7.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation ...............................................................................7-20 7.6.3 Configuration Process ........................................................................................................................7-21

7.7 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services ................................................................7-24 7.7.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ..................................................................................................7-25 7.7.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation ...............................................................................7-25 7.7.3 Configuration Process ........................................................................................................................7-26

7.8 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................7-28 7.8.1 Parameters: WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.........................................................................7-29 7.8.2 Parameters: WDM Service Configuration .........................................................................................7-34

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board ...............................................................................................8-1 8.1 Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals.................................................................................................................................................8-2

8.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ....................................................................................................8-2 8.1.2 Service Signal Flow .............................................................................................................................8-3 8.1.3 Configuration Process ..........................................................................................................................8-4

8.2 Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals.................................................................................................................................................8-6

8.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ....................................................................................................8-7 8.2.2 Service Signal Flow .............................................................................................................................8-8 8.2.3 Configuration Process ..........................................................................................................................8-8

8.3 Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals...............................................................................................................................................................8-11

8.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ..................................................................................................8-12 8.3.2 Service Signal Flow ...........................................................................................................................8-13 8.3.3 Configuration Process ........................................................................................................................8-13

8.4 Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal ................................................................................................................................................................8-16

8.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ..................................................................................................8-17 8.4.2 Service Signal Flow ...........................................................................................................................8-18 8.4.3 Configuration Process ........................................................................................................................8-18

8.5 Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Signal and Realizes the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function on the WDM Side ...................................................8-21

8.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram ..................................................................................................8-22 8.5.2 Service Signal Flow ...........................................................................................................................8-23 8.5.3 Configuration Process ........................................................................................................................8-23

Page 7: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide Contents

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

9 Tasks.............................................................................................................................................9-1 9.1 Configuring the ROADM..............................................................................................................................9-3

9.1.1 Configuring the Edge Port ...................................................................................................................9-4 9.1.2 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection..............................................................................9-6 9.1.3 Creating Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection ...............................................................................9-7

9.2 Configuring Common Cross-Connections ....................................................................................................9-9 9.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections ..............................................................................................................9-10 9.2.2 Activating Cross-Connections............................................................................................................9-11

9.3 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections .........................................................................................................9-12 9.3.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity ....................................................................9-12 9.3.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections......................................................................................................9-13

9.4 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services............................................................................................9-14 9.4.1 Configuring Trace Byte......................................................................................................................9-14 9.4.2 Configuring C2 Byte..........................................................................................................................9-15

9.5 Configuring Service Timeslots....................................................................................................................9-16 9.6 Configuring the Service Type......................................................................................................................9-17 9.7 Configuring Board WDM Interface Attributes............................................................................................9-18 9.8 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes..............................................................................................9-19 9.9 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the MCA Board ...................................................................................9-19 9.10 Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board .........................................................................................9-20 9.11 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board ...........................................................................................9-21 9.12 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board ....................................................................................9-22 9.13 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters...........................................................................................9-22 9.14 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs.................................................................................9-23 9.15 Configuring the Service Mode ..................................................................................................................9-24 9.16 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC) ......................................................................................................9-24 9.17 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board ..........................................................................9-25 9.18 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board.............................................................................9-26 9.19 Configuring Protection Trigger Conditions...............................................................................................9-26 9.20 Setting the NULL Mapping Status ............................................................................................................9-28 9.21 Configuring Path Binding .........................................................................................................................9-29 9.22 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring .....................................................................................9-29 9.23 Configuring the FEC Function ..................................................................................................................9-30 9.24 Enabling and Disabling LPT .....................................................................................................................9-31 9.25 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data....................................................................................................9-32

9.25.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods.............................................................9-32 9.25.2 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board..............................................................................9-34 9.25.3 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card .....................................................................9-35 9.25.4 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client ....................................................9-35 9.25.5 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board.............................................................................9-36 9.25.6 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card .................................................................................9-37 9.25.7 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client ................................................9-38

Page 8: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

Contents OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

A Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................... A-1

Page 9: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide About This Document

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

About This Document

Purpose This section describes the contents of the document, related product versions, intended audience, conventions, and update history.

Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 I V100R002

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004

OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004

OptiX iManager T2000 V200R008C00

Intended Audience The intended audiences of this document are:

Installation and Commissioning Engineer Data Configuration Engineer System Maintenance Engineer

Organization This document describes how to configure services on the T2000.

Chapter Description

Chapter 1 WDM Network Management Process

This topic describes the operation tasks that the T2000 manages the OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 equipments and the relation between the tasks.

Page 10: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

About This Document OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Chapter Description

Chapter 2 Starting the T2000 The following pages introduces some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth, troublefree launch of the T2000.

Chapter 3 Configuring IP over DCC

This chapter describes basic operations of IP over DCC configuration.

Chapter 4 Creating a Network This chapter describes basic operations such as NE creation.

Chapter 5 Performance Management

This chapter describes the related operations of performance management.

Chapter 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

This chapter describes how to configure the ROADM of WB Mode on NEs.

Chapter 7 Configuring WDM Services

This chapter describes methods of configuring the WDM transparent transmission services.

Chapter 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

This chapter describes how to configure the 11TOM Board.

Chapter 9 Tasks This chapter describes the common operations.

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

This appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document.

Conventions

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

Page 11: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide About This Document

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

Page 12: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

About This Document OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Convention Description

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.

Page 13: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 1 WDM Network Management Process

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

1 WDM Network Management Process

The WDM network management process describes the operation tasks of managing a WDM network by using the T2000, and the relations between the operation tasks.

For the detailed process for managing the OptiX OSN 6800, refer to Figure 1-1.

The procedure for managing the OptiX OSN 3800 is similar to the procedure for managing the OptiX OSN 6800.

Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 6800 equipment management process

Deploying aNetwork

WDM ASONFeature

ManagementConfiguring Services Maintaining a

NetworkConfiguring

WDM Features

Managing theOptical Power

AlarmManagement

PerformanceManagement

SoftwareManagement

ReportManagement

ConfigurationData

Management

Configuring theNE Time

ConfiguringClocks

Creating aNetwork

ConfiguringDCN

ConfiguringOrderwire

ConfiguringServices on a Per-

NE Basis

ConfiguringOptical Cross-Connections

Configuring WDMServices

ConfiguringOverhead

ConfiguringEthernet Services

ConfiguringEnd-to-End

Services

CustomerManagement

ConfiguringEAPE

ConfiguringROADM

Configuring IPA

ConfiguringALC

ConfiguringAPE

Manage WDMProtection

Subnet

Manage WDMTrail

Configuring WDMASON Networks

RoutineMaintenance for an

ASON Network

Handling ASONNetwork Failures

ConfiguringProtection

ConfiguringBoard

Parameters

For the detailed process of managing the OptiX OSN 8800 I, see Figure 1-2.

The OptiX OSN 8800 I V100R002 or a later version supports the SDH-related functions, including configuring SDH protection, SDH features, and SDH-ASON feature management.

Page 14: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

1 WDM Network Management Process OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 8800 I equipment management process

Deploying aNetwork

WDM ASONFeature

ManagementConfiguring WDM Services Maintaining a

NetworkConfiguring

WDM Features

Managing theOptical Power

AlarmManagement

PerformanceManagement

SoftwareManagement

ReportManagement

ConfigurationData

Management

Configuring theNE Time

ConfiguringClocks

Creating aNetwork

ConfiguringDCN

ConfiguringOrderwire

ConfiguringServices on a Per-

NE Basis

ConfiguringOptical Cross-Connections

Configuring WDMServices

ConfiguringOverhead

ConfiguringEthernet Services

ConfiguringEnd-to-End

Services

CustomerManagement

ConfiguringEAPE

ConfiguringROADM

Configuring IPA

ConfiguringALC

ConfiguringAPE

Manage WDMProtection

Subnet

Manage WDMTrail

Configuring WDMASON Networks

RoutineMaintenance for an

ASON Network

Handling ASONNetwork Failures

ConfiguringBoard

Parameters

ConfiguringSDH Protection

ConfiguringWDM Protection

ConfiguringSDH Features

ConfiguringSDH Services

ConfiguringEthernet Services

ConfiguringOverhead

SDH ASONFeature

Management

Configuring SDHASON Networks

RoutineMaintenance for an

ASON Network

Handling ASONNetwork Failures

The landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart shows the main phases of managing the WDM network by using the T2000. The phases include network deployment, service configuration, WDM feature configuration, network maintenance, and WDM ASON feature management. In the case of the service configuration, the end-to-end service configuration mode requires a license that supports the end-to-end WDM management, and the WDM ASON feature management requires a license that supports the WDM ASON feature. The WDM ASON feature is unique to the NG WDM. An NG WDM NE can use the WDM ASON feature management function only after the WDM ASON feature is enabled.

The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relations between operation tasks in each phase.

Page 15: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 2 Starting the T2000

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 Starting the T2000

About This Chapter The following pages introduces some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth, trouble-free launch of the T2000.

2.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000

The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are recommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in order not to affect other users that are operating the T2000.

2.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views

In the common views of the T2000, you can manage the topology, equipment, protection subnet and trail.

2.3 How to Change the IP Address of the T2000 Server

You need to change the IP address if the site network environment or the configuration changes. This section describes how to change the IP address of the T2000 server.

2.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000 The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are recommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in order not to affect other users that are operating the T2000.

Background Information Start the computer and the T2000 application in the following steps:

1. Start the computer. 2. Start the T2000 server. 3. Start the T2000 client.

Shut down the T2000 application and the computer in the following steps: 1. Exit the T2000 client. 2. Stop the T2000 server. 3. Shut down the computer.

Page 16: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

2 Starting the T2000 OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

2.1.1 Starting the Computer

To avoid computer damage or data loss, refer to the procedure provided to start the computer. The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required.

2.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server

After starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to the T2000 to manage the network.

2.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status

When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use the System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty.

2.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client

You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the T2000 client.

2.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client

Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit the T2000 client.

2.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server

When the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the T2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor to shut down the T2000 server.

2.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer

Normally, do not shut down the computer. In special situations, for example, when the computer becomes faulty, shut down the computer in the correct sequence. The shutdown procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required.

2.1.1 Starting the Computer To avoid computer damage or data loss, refer to the procedure provided to start the computer. The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required.

Prerequisite The T2000 must be installed correctly. The power cable of the workstation or the computer, the power cable of the monitor, data

line and Ethernet line must be connected correctly. If there is printer, modem or other peripherals, their power line and data line must be

connected correctly.

Background Information The T2000 can run in the UNIX or Windows operating systems. The functions are the same in each operating system. To learn about the recommended hardware configuration, refer to the OptiX iManager T2000 Product Description.

Page 17: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 2 Starting the T2000

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Procedure On UNIX

1. Power on the printer, modem and other peripherals. 2. Power on the workstation and the Solaris is automatically started. The Prompt dialog

box is displayed. 3. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User:

t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default). 4. Click OK to open the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) window.

On Windows 1. Power on the printer, modem and other peripherals. 2. Power on the computer and the Windows is automatically started. 3. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User:

t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default). 4. Click OK to open the Windows user interface.

----End

2.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server After starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to the T2000 to manage the network.

Prerequisite The computer where the T2000 is installed must be started correctly. The operating system of the T2000 server must be running correctly. The T2000 license must be in the correct directory. If the T2000 server is installed on

UNIX, copy the license to the directory /T2000/server/license/. If the T2000 server is installed on Windows, copy the license to the directory \T2000\server\license\.

On UNIX, the Sybase must be started and work normally. On Windows, the SQL Server must be started and work normally.

Procedure Step 1 Double-click the T2000Server icon on the desktop of the T2000 server.

Step 2 In the Login dialog box, enter User Name, Password and Server. For example, User Name: admin, Password: T2000 (T2000 is the default password of the admin user.) and Server: Local.

Periodically change the password and memorize it. If the System Monitor logs in to the server that is installed on another computer, you need to set the server to be logged in to in advance. The settings are similar to the settings of the server that a client logs in to remotely. For details, see Set the server parameters.

Step 3 Click Login. Wait until the database process, T2000 core process, and the processes that are optional according to the actual situation are in the Running state. Now the T2000 server is started successfully.

Page 18: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

2 Starting the T2000 OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 4 Optional: When needed, right-click on the process, and choose Start Process from the shortcut menu to start the Extended NE Management Process, NGWDM NE Management Process, RTN NE Management Process, SDH NE Management Process, WDM NE Management Process, ASON SDH Management Process, ASON WDM Management Process, End-to-End Common Management Process, End-to-End Eth Management Process, End-to-End OTN Management Process, End-to-End SDH Management Process, and Northbound Interface Module(SNMP) Process processes manually.

If the System Monitor application is started, you can restart the T2000 server on the System Monitor. Perform the following step: Choose System > Start Server on the Main Menu of the System Monitor. Wait until the database process, T2000 core process, and the processes that are optional according to the actual situation are in the Running state, the T2000 server is started properly.

----End

2.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use the System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty.

Background Information To view the status of the T2000 processes by UNIX command line, run the following command:

# /T2000/server/bin/showt2000server

If each process entered has a corresponding process ID and the specific ID does not change, the T2000 processes are normal.

Procedure Step 1 Start and log in to the System Monitor.

Step 2 In the user interface of the System Monitor, click the Process tab, and view whether the status of each process is Running.

If the process status is Stopped, right-click on the process, and choose Start Process from the shortcut menu. In this manner, the process is in the Running state.

If the manual startup fails, it indicates that the process is abnormal. To save resources, you can close unwanted processes. Set the startup mode of the desired

process to Manual, and then select Stop Process.

----End

2.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the T2000 client.

Prerequisite The T2000 server must be started correctly.

Page 19: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 2 Starting the T2000

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

Background Information When the T2000 server and the T2000 client are not on a computer, you need to install the client on the computer where the server resides. Set ACL on the client and then issue the ACL setting to the server.

On the T2000 client, choose System > NMS Security Settings > ACL from the Main Menu.

Click Add. In the dialog box displayed, enter related information. − Select IP Address or Segment and set an IP address or network section that can be

accessed according to the Example of format. − Select Start IP address to end IP address and set the rang of IP addresses that can

be accessed according to the Example of format.

Procedure Step 1 On the computer of the T2000 client, double-click the T2000Client icon on the desktop.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password of the T2000 client. For example, User Name: admin; Password: T2000.

After the automatic login is selected, you do not need to enter the user name and password. By default, the initial user name is admin, and the password is T2000. To protect the T2000 from

unauthorized logins, you need to immediately change this password. The administrator needs to create new T2000 users and assign them to certain authority groups.

Step 3 Optional: Set the server parameters.

1. Click to display the Server Setting dialog box. 2. Click New to display another Add Server dialog box. 3. In the Add Server dialog box, specify the IP Address, Mode and Server Name.

The IP Address is the IP address used by the T2000 server. The Mode has two options including Common and Security (SSL). When you choose the Security

(SSL) mode, the communication between the client and the server is encrypted. The communication mode of the client must be consistent with that of the server. Otherwise, the

client cannot log in to the server. To view the communication mode of the server, choose System > Communication Mode Settings on the Main Menu of the System Monitor.

You need not enter the Port number. After the Mode is specified, the system selects a Port number automatically.

4. Click OK to complete adding a server. 5. Click OK to complete the server settings.

Step 4 Select a server and click Login to access the T2000.

----End

2.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit the T2000 client.

Page 20: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

2 Starting the T2000 OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Prerequisite The T2000 client must be started normally.

Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.

If the layout of the view is changed and not saved, the Save Coordinates dialog box is displayed. Make a selection and then exit the client automatically.

----End

2.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server When the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the T2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor to shut down the T2000 server.

Prerequisite All the T2000 clients connected to the T2000 server must be shut down.

Background Information When performing the operations related to the database (such as initializing the T2000 database, restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations related to the T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing patches and re-installing the T2000), you need to shut down the T2000 server first. You are recommended to shut down the T2000 server in the way of "shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor".

Procedure Shut down the T2000 server only.

In this case, the MDP process is not shut down and the database cannot be initialized.

1. In the System Monitor, choose System > Stop Server from the Main Menu. 2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. When all the processes are in the Stopped

status, the T2000 server is stopped normally. Shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor.

After all the T2000 processes are finished, you can initialize the database.

1. In the System Monitor, choose System > Shutdown System from the Main Menu.

----End

Page 21: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 2 Starting the T2000

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

2.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer Normally, do not shut down the computer. In special situations, for example, when the computer becomes faulty, shut down the computer in the correct sequence. The shutdown procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required.

Prerequisite The T2000 server and client applications must be stopped.

Precaution

To avoid equipment damages or data loss, perform the following step one by one to shut down the workstation.

Procedure On UNIX platform

1. Enter the following commands in the terminal window, the UNIX workstation shuts down automatically:

% su root

Password: rootkit

# sync;sync;sync;sync;sync

# shutdown -y -g0 -i5

rootkit is the default password of super user root. If the password is changed, enter the new

password. To restart the Sun workstation, the last command is # shutdown -y -g0 -i6.

2. Turn off the peripheral equipment. On Windows platform

1. Choose Start > Shut down from the Windows desktop. 2. Choose Shut down and click OK in the dialog box. The computer shuts down

automatically. 3. Turn off the monitor and the peripheral equipment.

----End

2.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views In the common views of the T2000, you can manage the topology, equipment, protection subnet and trail.

2.2.1 Opening the Main Topology

Page 22: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

2 Starting the T2000 OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

On the Main Topology, you can manage topologies, protection subnets, and trails.

2.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer

The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After opening the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a hierarchical manner.

2.2.1 Opening the Main Topology On the Main Topology, you can manage topologies, protection subnets, and trails.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure To open the Main Topology, log in to the T2000 client. Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.

----End

2.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After opening the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a hierarchical manner.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

Background Information You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.

Procedure Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. In the displayed window, right-click

an NE in the left-hand pane and click .

For the OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800, the icon of the NE can be directly placed on the Main Topology.

Double-click the NE icon and then click to display the NE Explorer.

----End

2.3 How to Change the IP Address of the T2000 Server You need to change the IP address if the site network environment or the configuration changes. This section describes how to change the IP address of the T2000 server.

Page 23: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 2 Starting the T2000

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-9

Prerequisite The T2000 and the database must be shut down.

Procedure Step 1 In UNIX, change the IP address of the T2000 server.

1. Optional: If you already deploy the northbound interface instance, you should delete the instance before modifying the IP address. For details, see OptiX iManager T2000 Installation Guide.

2. Log in to the system as user root. 3. Open a terminal window. Choose Options > Font Size > Default, and then choose

Options > Window Size > 132×24 from the menu to adjust the terminal window accordingly.

4. Run the following commands. # cd /opt/HWICMR/bin

# ./changeip.sh

Enter the new IP address as prompted on the screen.

The number and names of the network cards must be consistent with the original configuration during installation.

5. Press Enter to restart the workstation. 6. Optional: If a northbound interface is enabled before you modify the IP address, you

need to reconfigure the northbound interface. For details, refer to OptiX iManager T2000 Installation Guide.

Step 2 In Windows, change the IP address of the T2000 server.

1. Optional: If you already deploy the northbound interface instance, you should delete the instance before modifying the IP address. For details, see OptiX iManager T2000 Installation Guide.

2. Log in to the operating system as a user of the Administrator authority. 3. Choose Start > Settings > Network Connections. The Network Connections dialog

box is displayed. 4. Right-click the network connection that you want to configure and choose Properties

from the shortcut menu. 5. In the General tab (for local connection) or Network tab (for other connections), click

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. 6. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box, enter a new IP address. 7. Optional: If a northbound interface is enabled before you modify the IP address, you

need to reconfigure the northbound interface. For details, refer to OptiX iManager T2000 Installation Guide.

----End

Page 24: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)
Page 25: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 3 Configuring IP over DCC

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

3 Configuring IP over DCC

About This Chapter This section describes the definition of the IP over DCC. It also respectively illustrates four communication modes between the NE and T2000.

3.1 Overview

This section describes the basic functions and features of IP over DCC.

3.2 Basic Operations

Describes the basic operation of configuring IP Over DCC on the T2000. Include the operation authority and precautions description.

3.3 Parameters

Describes the parameters involved in the IP Over DCC configuration on the T2000.

3.4 Application Example

This section describes three applications based on the three modes in which the T2000 communicates with the NE.

3.1 Overview This section describes the basic functions and features of IP over DCC.

The DCC is used to transmit the operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) data between WDM equipment. The protocol stacks used by different vendors are not compatible with each other. Thus, extra overhead bytes or service resources must be allocated to transmit DCC data transparently in a network composed of multi-vendor products.

The IP over DCC meets most of the networking requirements in existing networks without occupying extra overhead bytes or service resources. The IP over DCC simplifies the network structure, saves network resources, and meets the networking requirements quickly.

The IP over DCC supports the following features:

Adopts the standard TCP/IP protocol, which makes it compatible with other vendor's equipment and simplifies the network management.

Page 26: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

3 Configuring IP over DCC OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Adopts the forwarding function of the third layer in the protocol stack, which makes extra overheads or service paths unnecessary.

Brings flexible networking models. Brings simple upgrade modes and great compatibility. It is easy for IP over DCC to work

with new forwarding or multi-protocol features on the application layer.

IP over DCC support two remote accessing modes.

Gateway NE mode: The ECC protocol is used. For remote access, log in to the GNE that is connected to the computer. Then other NEs can be accessed through the NE ID. After the IP over DCC feature is added, this mode can still be used to access remote NEs.

Direct connection mode: The IP over DCC feature is used, and the remote NE can be connected directly through the IP address. You just need to enter the destination IP address in the login interface. For this mode, however, you need to add in advance the static route or default gateway in the network T2000 and the NE that needs to be accessed directly.

The router information of the NE can be queried on the following two user interfaces of the T2000:

Select the desired NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree, and the IP router information of the NE can be queried.

Select the desired NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree, and the ECC link information of the NE can be queried.

3.2 Basic Operations Describes the basic operation of configuring IP Over DCC on the T2000. Include the operation authority and precautions description.

For the related operations about creating the NE, refer to 4.2 Creating NEs.

3.2.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters

When configuring IP over DCC, you need to set the IP address, extended ID, gateway IP, and subnet mask of the NE.

3.2.2 Configuring Static Routing

If the NE adopts IP over DCC and direction communication connection mode, you need to configure a static route between the NM computer and the NE.

3.2.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters When configuring IP over DCC, you need to set the IP address, extended ID, gateway IP, and subnet mask of the NE.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Page 27: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 3 Configuring IP over DCC

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Precautions

The operation of modifying the NE communication parameters interrupts the communication and affects the services.

Procedure Step 1 Double-click the ONE icon on the Main Topology. The NE Panel tab is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer.

Step 3 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Step 4 Refer to Table 3-1 to set NE communication parameters according to the actual plan. Enter values in the IP address, Gateway IP, and Subnet Mask fields.

IP is the IP of the NE. Extended ID is the eight most significant bits in the 24 bits of the NE. It indicates different subnets. Gateway IP is different from IP. It is not the IP address of the NE. It is the IP address of the router

that is used to realize TCP/IP communication when the NE accesses the NM or NE in a remote end.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

3.2.2 Configuring Static Routing If the NE adopts IP over DCC and direction communication connection mode, you need to configure a static route between the NM computer and the NE.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure Step 1 Double-click the ONE icon on the Main Topology. The NE Panel tab is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click the NE icon on the Main Topology, and then select NE Explorer.

Step 3 Select the desired NE from the object tree. Then choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

Step 4 Click the IP Route Management tab.

Step 5 Click New. Configure the following parameters in the Create an IP Route dialog box.

Page 28: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

3 Configuring IP over DCC OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Destination Address: the IP address of the NE that requires communication Subnet Mask: the network mask code of the subnet where an NE resides Gateway IP: the IP address of the forwarding NE

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

3.3 Parameters Describes the parameters involved in the IP Over DCC configuration on the T2000.

Table 3-1 lists the NE communication parameters.

Table 3-1 NE communication parameters

Field Description

IP The IP address of an NE. After the IP address is set manually, any ID address change will no longer affect the IP.

Extended ID

The eight most significant bits in the 24 bit of the NE, also called the subnet number, used to identify different subnets.

Gateway IP For NEs communicating with the T2000 through IP over DCC protocol, gateway IP is the IP address of the NE with routing function.

Subnet Mask

The network mask code of the subnet where an NE resides, used to identify the network segment where an NE resides.

NSAP Address

Includes domain address and NE ID. The domain address is editable, which can be a hexadecimal number that contains a maximum of 13 bytes. This parameter gives no contribution in the configuration of IP Over DCC.

3.4 Application Example This section describes three applications based on the three modes in which the T2000 communicates with the NE.

3.4.1 Application 1: In Gateway NE Mode

If the T2000 and the GNE connect to the same Ethernet (the T2000 and the GNE must be in the same subnet), and other NEs are accessed in the gateway NE mode, you need not to add any static routes.

3.4.2 Application 2: In Gateway NE Mode (by Default Gateway)

If the T2000 connects with the GNE through a router and other NEs are accessed in the gateway NE mode, you need to add a default gateway on the T2000 and on the GNE.

3.4.3 Application 3: In Direct Connection Mode (by Static Routes)

Page 29: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 3 Configuring IP over DCC

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

If the T2000 and the GNE connect to the same Ethernet and other NEs are accessed in the direct connection mode, you need to set on the T2000 the default gateway to the IP address of the NE that is directly connected to the T2000. In addition, you need to add the static route to the non-GNEs, with the forwarding address as the IP address of the GNE.

3.4.1 Application 1: In Gateway NE Mode If the T2000 and the GNE connect to the same Ethernet (the T2000 and the GNE must be in the same subnet), and other NEs are accessed in the gateway NE mode, you need not to add any static routes.

Background Information As shown in Figure 3-1, the T2000 with the IP address of 129.9.0.100 uses the nearby NE1 as the GNE to access other NEs. You need not to add static routes on the T2000 or NEs.

For the related operations about creating the NE, refer to 4.2 Creating NEs.

Figure 3-1 Networking in gateway NE mode

NE nameIP address

Subnet mask

NE1129.9.0.1255.255.0.0

NE4133.168.0.3255.255.0.0

NE3133.168.0.2255.255.0.0

NE2133.168.0.1255.255.0.0

NM T2000IP address

Subnet mask 255.255.0.0129.9.0.100

T2000

DCC

LAN

3.4.2 Application 2: In Gateway NE Mode (by Default Gateway) If the T2000 connects with the GNE through a router and other NEs are accessed in the gateway NE mode, you need to add a default gateway on the T2000 and on the GNE.

Background Information As shown in Figure 3-2, the T2000 with the IP address of 10.100.11.12 connects with the GNE (NE1) through a router and accesses other NEs in the gateway NE mode. In this case, you need to set a default gateway on both the T2000 and NE1. Set the default gateway on the T2000 to 10.100.11.1, and that on NE1 to 129.9.0.254.

For the related operations about creating the NE, refer to 4.2 Creating NEs.

Page 30: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

3 Configuring IP over DCC OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Figure 3-2 Networking in default gateway NE mode

NE1129.9.0.1

255.255.0.0

NE4133.168.0.3255.255.0.0

NE3133.168.0.2255.255.0.0

NE2133.168.0.1255.255.0.0

129.9.0.254255.255.0.0

10.100.11.1255.0.0.0

NE nameIP address

Subnet maskDefault gateway

129.9.0.254

DCC

LAN

Router

NM T2000IP address

Subnet mask 255.0.0.010.100.11.12

Default gateway 10.100.11.1

T2000

Procedure Setting the default gateway of the NE

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and choose Communication > Communication Parameters in the Function Tree.

2. According to Figure 3-2, set the NE communication parameters. After each setting, click Apply to apply the setting.

Setting the default gateway of the T2000 computer

1. Choose Control Panel in Start menu, and then double-click Network Connection.

In Control Panel, it contains two views that are Classic View and Category View. The following steps take Classic View as an example.

2. Right-click which the network connection to be set in Network Connection field, and then choose Properties from the short cut menu.

Page 31: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 3 Configuring IP over DCC

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

3. In the Components checked are used by this connection field, click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.

Page 32: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

3 Configuring IP over DCC OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4. In the General tab, check the Use the following IP address check box, and set the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway based on the project plan.

5. Click OK.

----End

3.4.3 Application 3: In Direct Connection Mode (by Static Routes) If the T2000 and the GNE connect to the same Ethernet and other NEs are accessed in the direct connection mode, you need to set on the T2000 the default gateway to the IP address of the NE that is directly connected to the T2000. In addition, you need to add the static route to the non-GNEs, with the forwarding address as the IP address of the GNE.

Background Information As shown in Figure 3-3, if the T2000 with the IP address of 129.9.0.100 needs to access NE3 directly, you need to add the static route to 133.168.0.0/16 on the T2000.

Adding the static route to 133.168.0.0/16 indicates that the static routes in the whole network section 133.168.0.0/16 are added. Hence, the NM with the IP address of 129.9.0.100 can directly access the NE that belongs to the network section, such as NE2, NE3 and NE4.

Page 33: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 3 Configuring IP over DCC

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

Figure 3-3 Networking in direct connection mode

NE1129.9.0.1

255.255.0.0

NE4133.168.0.3255.255.0.0

NE3133.168.0.2255.255.0.0

NE2133.168.0.1255.255.0.0

NE nameIP address

Static routes

NM T2000IP address 129.9.0.100

Static routesDestination:133.168.0.0Mask:

255.255.0.0

DCC

LAN

T2000

For details on how to create an NE, refer to 4.2 Creating NEs. For details on how to set the IP address of the T2000 computer, refer to 3.4.2 Application 2: In

Gateway NE Mode (by Default Gateway). This section describes only the configuration of the static routes of computer.

Procedure Step 1 Click Run in the Start menu on the T2000 computer in Windows platform. Enter cmd and

click OK, the cmd.exe window is displayed.

Step 2 Enter the following command:route add 133.168.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0 129.9.0.1.

The format of the command used to add a static route on Windows computer is as follows:

route add <Destination Address> mask <Subnet Mask> <Gateway IP>

Step 3 Press Enter.

Step 4 Optional: Enter the command route print in the cmd.exe window and press Enter. Then you can view all the created static routes. The created routes are displayed on the interface.

----End

Page 34: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)
Page 35: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

4 Creating a Network

About This Chapter You can use the T2000 to create a subnet, an NE, and the topology of fibers or cables, and to configure NE data, check or modify board parameters. You can also use the T2000 to manage the subnet, NE, and fibers or cables.

4.1 Network Creation Procedure

You can refer to the following procedure to create a network.

4.2 Creating NEs

Each equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Before the T2000 manages the actual equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. There are two methods of creating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a large number of NEs, for example, during deployment, it is recommended that you create NEs in batches. When you need to create only a few NEs, it is recommended that you create the NEs one by one.

4.3 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack

The OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I support the management of master/slave subracks. When multiple subracks are required for an NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralized management. In this mode, multiple subracks are displayed as one NE in the T2000.

4.4 Creating Optical NEs

The T2000 allocates the WDM equipmentinto different optical NEs for management. There are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and WDM_OTM. OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 only support WDM_OTM, WDM_OLA and WDM_OADM.

4.5 Creating an NE User

To ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NE user is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The T2000 administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.

4.6 Switching a Logged-In NE User

During a new deployment, after the root NE user creates the NE, this user can create another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.

Page 36: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4.7 Configuring the NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE.

4.8 Configuring Boards

In the NE Panel, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.

4.9 Creating Fibers

A link is a physical or logical connection between two topological objects in the Main Topology. When configuring or managing the network by using the , you need to create links between different topological objects.

4.10 Configuring NE Clock Sources

The time source for a WDM NE is determined by the clock used by the SCC board. To synchronize networkwide clocks, you need to modify the clock used by the SCC board according to the specific network configuration. The selection of clock sources determines the directions and termination points for networkwide clock synchronization.

4.11 Configuring Orderwire

You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the T2000.

4.12 Configuring the NE Time

Time consistency between the T2000 and NEs is very important for troubleshooting and network monitoring. You should set the T2000 time and NE time before service configuration.

4.13 Parameters

Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.

4.14 Parameters: WDM Interface

In this window, you can configure the WDM interface.

4.1 Network Creation Procedure You can refer to the following procedure to create a network.

Table 4-1 Configuration procedure

Phase Configuration Mode

Creating Optical NEs Creating Optical NEs.

Create an NE by using the search function or manually create a single NE.

Creating NEs

Create NEs in batches.

Adding a Slave Subrack.

Modifying Subrack Name

Configuring Master/Slave Subrack

Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack

Page 37: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

Phase Configuration Mode

Deleting a Slave Subrack

Creating an NE User Creating an NE User.

Switching a Logged-In NE User Switching a Logged-In NE User.

Configuring the NE Data Manually.

Replicating the NE Data.

Configuring the NE Data

Uploading the NE Data.

Adding Boards. Configuring Boards

Checking Board Parameters.

Creating Fibers Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode/Graphic Mode/List Mode.

Configure the embedded control channel (ECC) communication.

Configure the IP Over DCC communication.

Configure the OSI Over DCC communication.

Configuring the DCN

Modify the DCN configuration parameters. This operation is optional

Adding Clock Sources. Configuring NE Clock Sources

Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE.

Setting the Orderwire Board.

Configuring Orderwire.

Configuring Conference Calls.

Configuring Express Orderwire.

Configuring Orderwire

Dividing Orderwire Subnets.

Synchronizing the NE Time with the T2000 Server Automatically/Synchronizing the NE Time with the T2000 Server Manually.

Configuring the NE Time

Configuring the Standard NTP Key, or Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time

Configuring alarm suppression Set rules for the suppression of inter-board alarms.

Page 38: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4.2 Creating NEs Each equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Before the T2000 manages the actual equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. There are two methods of creating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a large number of NEs, for example, during deployment, it is recommended that you create NEs in batches. When you need to create only a few NEs, it is recommended that you create the NEs one by one.

4.2.1 Creating NEs in Batches

When the T2000 communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation.

4.2.2 Creating a Single NE

After the NE is created, you can use the T2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not.

4.2.1 Creating NEs in Batches When the T2000 communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.

The T2000 must communicate properly with the GNE.

The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Search > Auto Discovery... from the Main Menu. The Auto Discovery

window is displayed.

Step 2 In the Search Domain dialog box, click Add and the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed.

Page 39: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

Step 3 Set Address type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or NSAP Address, and enter Search Address, User Name, and Password. Then, click OK.

You can repeat Steps 2 through 3 to add more search domains. You can delete the system default search domain.

If you use IP address to search for NEs: Usually, the broadcast function is disabled on the routers on a network, to avoid network broadcast

storm. Therefore, by using the IP Address Range of GNE method, only the NEs in the same network segment can be searched out.

To search the network segments across routers, the IP Address of GNE method is recommended. Through a gateway NE, you can search out the NEs in the network segment of the gateway NE.

Step 4 In the Search for NE dialog box, you can perform the following operations:

Select Search for NE and click OK to search for all NEs in the selected domain. Select Create device after search, and enter NE user and Password. Then, click OK.

The default NE user is root. The default password is password.

Select Upload after create and click OK, so that the NE data can be uploaded to the T2000 after the NE is created.

If you select all options in the Search for NE dialog box, you can search for NEs, create the NEs, and upload the NE data at one time.

Page 40: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 5 Select Enable search. Click Next, Switch to the search NE interface.

Step 6 Optional: If you select Search for NE only, you can select the NEs, which are not yet created, in the Result list after the search for NEs is complete. Click Create and then the Create dialog box is displayed. Enter User Name and Password in the Create dialog box, and then click OK.

----End

Postrequisite After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:

The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user. The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE

user.

4.2.2 Creating a Single NE After the NE is created, you can use the T2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher. For OptiX OSN 8800 I, the license must be installed and the license must support

creating the NE of the type. The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

Context First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE.

If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the T2000 is abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.

Procedure Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Device from the

shortcut menu. The Add Object dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Select the NE type from the Object Type tree.

Page 41: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

Step 3 Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks.

Step 4 To create a GNE, proceed to Step 5. To create a non-gateway NE, proceed to Step 6.

Step 5 Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list and set the IP address.

Step 6 Select Non-Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the GNE to which the NE is associated to from the Affiliated Gateway drop-down list.

Step 7 Select the optical NE to which the WDM NE is associated.

When creating the OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800 NE, you need not to choose the optical NE that is NE belongs to and this NE is directly created on the Main Topology.

Step 8 Enter the NE User and Password.

The default NE user is root, and the default password is password.

Step 9 Click OK. and click Open in the dialog box displayed.

----End

Result After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as the IP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the T2000 database.

Postrequisite After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:

The communication between the T2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID.

The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user. The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE

user.

Page 42: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4.3 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack The OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I support the management of master/slave subracks. When multiple subracks are required for an NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralized management. In this mode, multiple subracks are displayed as one NE in the T2000.

4.3.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration

In the master/slave subrack mode, the master subrack and its multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP address.

4.3.2 Adding a Slave Subrack

After slave subracks are added, multiple slave subracks can communicate with the T2000 through a master subrack. Thus, the service grooming capability of the equipment is enhanced.

4.3.3 Changing a Subrack Name

You can set the attributes of the master or slave subrack to change the name of the master or slave subrack.

4.3.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack

This section describes how to query the status of a slave subrack. The status includes Physical Installed, Logical Installed, and Not Installed.

4.3.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack

The slave subrack that need not be managed by the T2000 can be deleted.

4.3.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration In the master/slave subrack mode, the master subrack and its multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP address.

Generally, the subrack where the optical amplifier board, optical supervisory channel (OSC) board, and fiber interface unit (FIU) exist is selected as the master subrack.

4.3.2 Adding a Slave Subrack After slave subracks are added, multiple slave subracks can communicate with the T2000 through a master subrack. Thus, the service grooming capability of the equipment is enhanced.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE and then choose the NE from the left pane

of the NE Panel.

Page 43: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

Step 2 In the right pane, right-click and choose Add Slave Subrack from the shortcut menu. The Add Slave Subrack dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 In the Add Slave Subrack dialog box, set parameters and then click OK.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 8800 I, set Cross-Connect Type and Cross-Connect Capacity for the subrack.

Step 4 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

4.3.3 Changing a Subrack Name You can set the attributes of the master or slave subrack to change the name of the master or slave subrack.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The master or slave subrack has been created.

Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE and then choose the NE from the left pane

of the NE Panel.

Step 2 Choose the required master or slave subrack from the upper side of the slot layout in the right pane. Right-click the subrack and then choose Modify Subrack Attribute from the shortcut menu to display the Modify Subrack Attribution dialog box.

Step 3 Change the Subrack Name and click OK.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 8800 I, set Cross-Connect Type and Cross-Connect Capacity for the subrack.

----End

Page 44: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4.3.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack This section describes how to query the status of a slave subrack. The status includes Physical Installed, Logical Installed, and Not Installed.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The master or slave subrack has been created.

Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE and then choose the NE from the left pane

of the NE Panel.

Step 2 Click to refresh the state of the NE Panel. On the NE Panel, you can query the status of the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.

Click to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.

----End

4.3.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack The slave subrack that need not be managed by the T2000 can be deleted.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

All boards that are manually created on the slave subrack are deleted.

Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE and then choose the NE from the left pane

of the NE Panel.

Page 45: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

Step 2 Choose the required master or slave subrack from the upper side of the slot layout in the right pane. Right-click the subrack and then choose Delete the Subrack from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 Click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

----End

4.4 Creating Optical NEs The T2000 allocates the WDM equipmentinto different optical NEs for management. There are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and WDM_OTM. OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 only support WDM_OTM, WDM_OLA and WDM_OADM.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher. For OptiX OSN 8800 I, the license must be installed and the license must support

creating the NE of the type.

Procedure Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Device from the

shortcut menu.

Step 2 Select the optical NE type for the optical NE in the Add Object dialog box.

Step 3 In the General Attributes tab, set the attributes of the optical NE.

Step 4 Click the Resource Division tab. Select NEs or boards from the Select Boards and click

.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 Click in the blank space of the Main Topology and the NE icon appears in the position where you clicked.

----End

4.5 Creating an NE User To ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NE user is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The T2000 administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.

Page 46: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.

Context The default NE user has the monitor level authority. To ensure NE data security, it is recommended that you assign NE users with different authorities as required.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > NE Security Management > NE User Management from the Main

Menu.

Step 2 In the NE list on the left, select an NE and click .

Step 3 Click Add and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Enter the NE user name in the NE User field.

Page 47: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

The NE user name must contain letters, or it can be a combination of letters, symbols and numerals. The NE user name contains at least 4, but not more than 16 characters.

Step 5 Select the User Level as needed.

Step 6 In the NE User Flag field, select a user type according to the type of the terminal through which the user logs in to the NE.

Step 7 Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field.

The password is a string of 6-16 characters. It can consist of letters, symbols and numerals, and must contain at least one letter and one numeral.

Step 8 In the NE Name field, select the NEs that this NE user is allowed to manage.

Step 9 Click OK.

----End

4.6 Switching a Logged-In NE User During a new deployment, after the root NE user creates the NE, this user can create another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher. The NE user must be created.

Background Information An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at multiple clients at the same time. After you use an NE user to log in to an NE through a T2000 server, if you use the same NE user to log in to the same NE through another T2000 server, the NE user is forced to log out from the first T2000 server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > NE Security Management > NE Login Management from the Main

Menu, click the NE Login Management tab.

Step 2 Select the required NE from the NE list, and click .

When this button is used for the first time, or the configuration data is changed, or the selected object on the Object Tree on the left is changed, this button becomes red.

Step 3 Click Query to query the current NE user.

Step 4 In the NE Login Management Table, select the NE and click Switch NE User. In the Switch Current NE User dialog box, enter User and Password, and set Offline Switching.

Step 5 Click OK.

Page 48: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

----End

4.7 Configuring the NE Data Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE.

4.7.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually

By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.

4.7.2 Replicating the NE Data

You can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is already configuration and if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE version as the new NE.

4.7.3 Uploading the NE Data

By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network management system directly.

4.7.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The NE must be created successfully.

Procedure Step 1 Double-click the optical NE with unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Then, double-click

the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is

Page 49: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

displayed.

Step 2 Choose Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side.

Step 3 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that manual configuration interrupts the service on the NE.

Step 4 Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment Type, NE Remarks and Subrack Type.

Step 6 Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed.

Step 7 Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE.

Step 8 Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.

Step 9 Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board.

Step 10 Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.

Step 11 Choose Verify and Run as required and click Finish.

Verification is to run the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to NEs and the basic configuration of the NEs is complete. After the successful verification, the NEs start to work normally.

----End

4.7.2 Replicating the NE Data You can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is already configuration and if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE version as the new NE.

Page 50: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The NE must be created successfully.

The type and NE software version of the source NE must be consistent with the type and software version of the replicated NE.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE whose data you need to replicate. Double-click the optical NE with

unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Then, double-click the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Select Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select the NE from the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation copies all the data of the source NE.

After the NE data is replicated, only the data on the T2000 side is changed, but the data on the equipment side is not changed.

Step 4 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation results in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is copied.

Step 5 Click OK to start the replication. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed after a few seconds.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

4.7.3 Uploading the NE Data By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network management system directly.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The NE must be created successfully.

Page 51: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE whose data you need to Replicate. Double-click the optical NE with

unconfigured subrack on the Main Topology. Then, double-click the unconfigured subrack in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Select Upload and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the upload may take a long time.

Step 3 Click OK to start the upload. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed when the uploading is complete.

Step 4 Click Close.

----End

4.8 Configuring Boards In the NE Panel, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.

4.8.1 Adding Boards

When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment.

4.8.2 Checking Board Parameters

You can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before you configure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of board parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements.

4.8.3 Adding Ports

Client-side ports and line-side ports of some OTU boards support color light and colorless light. You need to add different ports on the T2000 according to the SFP optical module used on the equipment.

4.8.1 Adding Boards When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be created. There must be idle slot on the NE Panel.

Context The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the subrack. A logical board refers to a board that is created on the T2000. After a logical board is created, you can configure the relevant services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can be available.

Page 52: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Procedure Step 1 Double-click the icon of the optical NE to open the NE Panel. In the left pane of the NE Panel,

click the NE that you want to add a board.

Step 2 Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the drop-down list.

----End

4.8.2 Checking Board Parameters You can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before you configure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of board parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements.

Procedure Step 1 Choose the corresponding item from the Function Tree to check the relevant board

parameters.

1. Check the parameters for an optical transponder unit. Table 4-2 lists the parameters for the optical transponder unit.

Table 4-2 List of parameters for an optical transponder unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Laser Status 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

4. Click the Basic Attributes tab.

You can turn on or shut down a laser by setting the laser status.

Automatic Laser Shutdown 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

4. Click the Basic Attributes tab.

When no light is input, a laser is automatically shut down and stops transmitting optical signals. The laser life can be prolonged by decreasing the on time of the laser. In addition, this function prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.

Page 53: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-19

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

LPT Enabled 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

You can add the overhead byte that supports the LPT protocol to the frame format of a WDM-side signal, to monitor the running status of the network access point or the service network.

NULL Mapping Status 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel or Board from the drop-down list.

4. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

You can set NULL Mapping Status to Enabled for a path that has no signal, and check or view OTN overhead by using an instrument, to monitor the status of paths in a network.

OFC Enabled 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

4. Click the Basic Attributes tab.

The OFC function is used to control the transmit optical power of a laser when a fiber is cut, and check whether the fiber recovers by sending a short laser pulse.

Port Enabled 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select Internal Port.

When you configure a service for the port on an Ethernet board, enable the internal port (that is, VCTRUNK port).

Page 54: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

TAG 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select Internal Port.

Set the port type of the internal port on an Ethernet board on an NE based on the tag attribute of packets that are transmitted by the user-side equipment.

Network Attribute 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select Internal Port.

If the port is of the UNI type, the port processes the tag attributes specified in 802.1Q and the port has the tag, access and hybrid attributes. If the port is of the C-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes in 802.1Q. The port determines that the data packet carries a C-VLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the C-VLAN tag. If the port is of the S-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes specified in 802.1Q. The port determines that the data packet carries a S-VLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the S-VLAN tag.

Port Enabled 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select External Port.

When you configure a service for the port on an Ethernet board, enable the external port (that is, PORT port).

Page 55: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-21

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Working Mode 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select External Port.

Set the transmit end and receive end to have the same setting of working mode.

MAC/PHY LoopBack 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select External Port.

MAC loopback and PHY loopback are used to locate a fault, but the two functions interrupt services. The two functions are mutually exclusive. When you set MAC LoopBack to Inloop, PHY LoopBack is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When you set PHY LoopBack to Inloop, MAC LoopBack is automatically set to Non-Loopback.

Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select External Port.

When the Working Mode of the port is Auto-Negotiation, select the autonegotiation flow control mode.

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select External Port.

When the Working Mode of the port is not Auto-Negotiation, select the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.

Page 56: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

TAG 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select External Port.

Set the port type of the external port on an Ethernet board on an NE based on the tag attribute of packets that are transmitted by the user-side equipment.

Network Attribute 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select External Port.

The Port Attribute (Ethernet Port) parameter specifies the position of a port in the network. Different port attributes support different packets.

2. Check the parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit. Table 4-3 lists the parameters for the tributary unit and the line unit.

Table 4-3 List of parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Laser Status You can turn on or shut down a laser by setting the laser status.

Automatic Laser Shutdown When no light is input, a laser is automatically shut down and stops transmitting optical signals. The laser life can be prolonged by decreasing the on time of the laser. In addition, this function prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.

LPT Enabled

1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel or Board from the drop-down menu.

You can add the overhead byte that supports the LPT protocol to the frame format of a WDM-side signal, to monitor the running status of the network access point or the service network.

Page 57: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-23

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

NULL Mapping Status You can set NULL Mapping Status to Enabled for a path that has no signal, and check or view OTN overhead by using an instrument, to monitor the status of paths in a network.

OFC Enabled The OFC function is used to control the transmit optical power of a laser when a fiber is cut, and check whether the fiber recovers by sending a short laser pulse.

Port Enabled When you configure a service for the port on an Ethernet board, enable the port.

TAG

1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select External Port or Internal Port.

Set the port type of the internal port on an Ethernet board on an NE based on the tag attribute of packets that are transmitted by the user-side equipment.

Page 58: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Network Attribute If a port is of the UNI type, the port processes the tag attributes specified in 802.1Q and the port has the tag aware, access and hybrid attributes.

If the port is of the C-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes specified in 802.1Q. The port determines that the data packet carries a C-VLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the C-VLAN tag.

If the port is of the S-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes specified in 802.1Q. The port determines that the data packet carries an S-VLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the S-VLAN tag.

Entry Detection Entry detection identifies the tag of data packets. When you configure a VLAN, you can set the Entry Detection parameter of a service to Enabled.

Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppressing

Broadcast packet suppression functions according to the ratio of broadcast packets to all packets. The value is 110 in increments of 1.

Working Mode Set the transmit end and receive end to have the same setting of working mode.

Page 59: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-25

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Path Binding 1. In the NE Explorer, selecting the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Path Binding from the Function Tree.

Configure path binding to realize inverse multiplexing of client-side signals. The higher order signals that are accessed on the client side are inversely multiplexed into several lower order signals, to decrease the bandwidth of an optical interface.

3. Check the parameters for an optical amplifying unit. Table 4-4 lists the parameters for the optical amplifying unit.

Table 4-4 List of parameters for an optical amplifying unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Laser Status 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down menu.

4. Click the Basic Attributes tab.

You can turn on or shut down a laser by setting the laser status.

4. Check the parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit. Table 4-5 lists the parameters for the spectrum analyzer unit.

Page 60: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Table 4-5 List of parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Wavelength Monitor Status 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Monitor Wavelength from the drop-down menu.

Enable wavelength monitoring.

5. Check the parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit. Table 4-6 lists the parameters for the optical supervisory channel unit.

Table 4-6 List of parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Laser Status 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down menu.

You can turn on or shut down a laser by setting the laser status.

6. Check the parameters for SDH units. Table 4-7 lists the parameters for the SDH units.

Page 61: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-27

Table 4-7 List of parameters for SDH unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Laser Switch 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Port from the drop-down menu.

You can open or close a laser by setting the laser switch.

Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback

1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Port from the drop-down menu.

Sets loopback according to the path.

Automatic Laser Shutdown 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration from the Function Tree.

When no light is input, a laser is automatically shut down and stops transmitting optical signals. The laser life can be prolonged by decreasing the on time of the laser. In addition, this function prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.

VC4 Path Overhead 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management from the Function Tree.

You can query and set overhead bytes of the VC4 path, including J1 and C2.

VC3 Path Overhead 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management from the Function Tree.

You can query and set overhead bytes of the VC3 path, including J1 and C2.

Page 62: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

PRBS Test 1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board.

2. Choose Configuration from the Function Tree.

You can set PRBS test of the interfaces on the board, and perform the bit error test of the transmission link without attaching a meter to the equipment during the deployment.

If you select an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing board, a static optical add/drop multiplexing board, a dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing board, an optical protection board, or a variable optical attenuator board, you can choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Then, you can query or set parameters.

Step 2 Modify the board parameters based on service planning and actual board configuration. For instructions on how to modify board parameters, see Modifying Board Parameters.

----End

4.8.3 Adding Ports Client-side ports and line-side ports of some OTU boards support color light and colorless light. You need to add different ports on the T2000 according to the SFP optical module used on the equipment.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. Applies to the LOM, LOG, TDX, ECOM, TBE, TMX, LDMS, LDMD, 12LDMS,

12LDMD, 12LQMS, 12LQMD, 13LQMS, 13LQM, 12TQM, TOM and LQG board of the NG WDM equipment.

There are client-side ports or line-side ports that are not added on the T2000.

Context By default, each board is added with client side ports. To add ports, you need to delete the client side ports that are added by default on the T2000.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Panel, select a board, right-click, and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 In the Path View, right-click in the blank area and choose Add Port from the shortcut menu. The Add Port dialog box is displayed.

Page 63: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-29

Step 3 Select the Port, Type, and Level. Click OK.

The types are as following:

Client Side Colorless Optical Port Client Side Color Optical Port Line Side Color Optical Port

----End

4.9 Creating Fibers A link is a physical or logical connection between two topological objects in the Main Topology. When configuring or managing the network by using the , you need to create links between different topological objects.

4.9.1 Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode

After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE. You can synchronize on the T2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the T2000 side.

4.9.2 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode

In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of fibers one by one.

4.9.3 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode

In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only.

4.9.1 Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE. You can synchronize on the T2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the T2000 side.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The corresponding logical board must be created.

Context Background Information

Conflicting fibers refer to the different fibers configured on the NE and T2000 sides. Click Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the Uncreated Fiber in T2000 and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers cannot be synchronized between the T2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the

Page 64: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

networking design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the remaining fibers.

The T2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so, Choose File > Search > WDM Fiber Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Fiber Synchronization from

the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the T2000 side and that on the NE side are displayed.

Synchronized Fiber: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the T2000 and NE sides.T2000 is the same as the fiber data on NEs. Uncreated Fiber in T2000: Indicates the fibers that exist on only the NE side. Uncreated Fiber in NE: Indicates the fibers that exist on only the T2000 side.

Step 3 Handle different situations as follows:Synchronized Fiber list.

If uncreated fiber in T2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized fibers are displayed in the

If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/Cable to delete the uncreated fibers in T2000 or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then click to re-create the remaining fibers.

----End

4.9.2 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of fibers one by one.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Optical NEs and NEs must be created. The line boards that have the ports at the same level must be created on the T2000 or the

physical boards must be installed correctly. Applies to WDM equipment.

Procedure To create fiber connections inside an NE, do as follows:

1. Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. Click the Signal Flow Diagram tab. 2. In the Signal Flow Diagram, right-click in the blank area and choose Create Fiber from

the shortcut menu. The cursor is displayed as "+". 3. Select the source board and port and click OK. The cursor is displayed as "+". 4. Select the sink board and port and click OK.

Page 65: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-31

When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and exit object selection.

5. In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.

6. Click OK.

To creating fiber connections between NEs, do as follows:

Creating fiber connections between NEs is performed on the Main Topology. Actually, the FIU fiber connections between stations are created.

1. Click the shortcut icon on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed as "+" . 2. Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology. 3. Select the source board and source port in the Select the source end of the link dialog

box displayed. 4. Click OK.

The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+" again.

5. Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology. 6. Select the sink board and sink port in the Select the sink end of the link dialog box

displayed. 7. Click OK and enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box

displayed. 8. Click OK.

The created fiber is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE on the Main Topology.

----End

Page 66: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Postrequisite After you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that the fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.

4.9.3 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The board on relevant NEs must be created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click Create, and the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click Select Object, select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 New in the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box.

Step 6 Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port, Sink NE and Sink Port.

Step 7 Click Apply.

You can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 5, click Apply.

Step 8 Repeat Step 5-7 to create another fiber connection.

Step 9 Click Cancel to complete the settings. The created fiber connections are displayed in the Fiber/Cable Information list.

----End

Page 67: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-33

Postrequisite After you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that the fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.

4.10 Configuring NE Clock Sources The time source for a WDM NE is determined by the clock used by the SCC board. To synchronize networkwide clocks, you need to modify the clock used by the SCC board according to the specific network configuration. The selection of clock sources determines the directions and termination points for networkwide clock synchronization.

4.10.1 Adding Clock Sources

When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, you can add clock sources to provide different reference clocks. You can select different clock sources to decide the direction of clock synchronization in the network.

4.10.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE

When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities. The clock source with the highest priority is chosen for synchronization. You can set clock source priorities to adjust the direction of clock synchronization in the network.

4.10.1 Adding Clock Sources When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, you can add clock sources to provide different reference clocks. You can select different clock sources to decide the direction of clock synchronization in the network.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applies to the SCC board.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC board and choose Configuration > Clock Priority from

the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query clock source priorities.

Clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities.

Page 68: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 3 In the clock source list, right-click and choose Add Clock Source from the shortcut menu. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 In the Add Clock Source dialog box, select a clock source and click OK. The selected clock source appears in the clock source list.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

4.10.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities. The clock source with the highest priority is chosen for synchronization. You can set clock source priorities to adjust the direction of clock synchronization in the network.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applies to the SCC board.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC board and choose Configuration > Clock Priority from

the Function Tree.

The clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities.

Step 2 Click Query to query clock source priorities.

Step 3 Select a clock source, and click or to adjust the clock source priority.

The priority of the internal clock source is the lowest and cannot be adjusted.

Page 69: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-35

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

4.11 Configuring Orderwire You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the T2000.

4.11.1 Setting the Orderwire Board

Before you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board first.

4.11.2 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can configure orderwire for NEs.

4.11.3 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.

4.11.4 Configuring Express Orderwire

In the case of two NEs without a fiber connection, you can configure the express orderwire to provide the maintenance personnel with an express orderwire channel between the NEs.

4.11.5 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.

4.11.1 Setting the Orderwire Board Before you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board first.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be the OptiX OSN 8800 I, OptiX OSN 6800 or the OptiX OSN 3800. The SC1 or SC2 boards must be created. For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I, only the SC1 or SC2 boards on the

main subrack supports the orderwire function.

Background Information The orderwire can be used only when the orderwire board is configured with the NE.

You can also set one orderwire channel for an SC1 or SC2 board that does not serve as an orderwire board.

Page 70: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function

Tree. Click the Orderwire Board Settings tab.

Step 2 Click Query to query the NE-side information.

Step 3 Select a board from the Available Boards pane in the Orderwire Board Settings group box and click .

Selected board serves as the selected board of the first orderwire. You can also use one SC1 or SC2 board that serves as a non-orderwire board and set it as the

selected board of the second orderwire.

Step 4 If several SC1/SC2 boards are configured, you can set the second orderwire board for the NE in the Settings for the Second Orderwire Phone window. Select a board from the Available Boards pane in the Settings for the Second Orderwire Phone group box and click .

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

4.11.2 Configuring Orderwire To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can configure orderwire for NEs.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. SC1 or SC2 board has been configured.

Page 71: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-37

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function

Tree. Click the General tab.

Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 3 Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.

Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication.

When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds.

The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet. Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length is

eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number length must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to Dividing Orderwire Subnets.

The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number. A piece of NG WDM equipment supports a maximum of two channels of orderwire. If the length of the subnet number is 1, the first digit of the two orderwire numbers must be the same.

If the length of the subnet number is 2, the first two digits of the two orderwire numbers must be the same.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

4.11.3 Configuring Conference Calls To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Page 72: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function

Tree. Click the Conference Call tab.

Step 2 Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE.

Step 3 In the Available Conference Call Port pane, select the port where you want to configure a conference call, and click .

If the optical interfaces that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasing loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.

The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the orderwire phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number is recommended to be 9999.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

4.11.4 Configuring Express Orderwire In the case of two NEs without a fiber connection, you can configure the express orderwire to provide the maintenance personnel with an express orderwire channel between the NEs.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Page 73: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-39

The SCC board must be created.

Two NEs must be connected through serial ports or by a telephone line.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function

Tree. Click the Auxiliary tab.

Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 3 Click Apply.

Step 4 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 to configure the orderwire on another station.

----End

4.11.5 Dividing Orderwire Subnets When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Conference calls must be configured.

Background Information Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call

Page 74: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. For example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conference call number of the subnet 1 is 199.

The optical interfaces with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

The different optical interfaces on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE can belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function

Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet NO. Length.

When the Subnet NO. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range of 0 to 9. When the Subnet NO. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.

Step 3 Click the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface tab.

Step 4 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 5 Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and enter a subnet number.

The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

4.12 Configuring the NE Time Time consistency between the T2000 and NEs is very important for troubleshooting and network monitoring. You should set the T2000 time and NE time before service configuration.

4.12.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the T2000 and NEs

With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the T2000 server time. In this way, the T2000 is able to record the correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.

4.12.2 Synchronizing the NE Time with the T2000 Server Automatically

The NE time can be automatically synchronized with the T2000 server time. In this way, the time of alarms and logs can be correctly recorded in the T2000.

4.12.3 Synchronizing the NE Time with the T2000 Server Manually

In the case of NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, you need to check whether the NE time is consistent with the T2000 server time, so that the T2000 can correctly record the time of alarm generation. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of the T2000 server.

4.12.4 Configuring the Standard NTP Key

Page 75: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-41

On the T2000, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To ensure that a reliable server is accessed, the NTP authentication function must be started. In this case, you need to set the key and password, which are authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.

4.12.5 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time

You can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time.

4.12.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the T2000 and NEs With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the T2000 server time. In this way, the T2000 is able to record the correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.

When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the T2000, the time at which such alarms and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the T2000. This may cause trouble in fault location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the T2000 provides two time synchronization schemes: synchronizing with the T2000 server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server.

If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the T2000 server, all NEs use the T2000 server time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the T2000 server time manually or automatically. The T2000 server time refers to the system time of the workstation or computer where the T2000 server resides. This scheme features easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to time.

If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the standard NTP server, all NEs and the T2000 are synchronized with the standard NTP server automatically. The NTP server can be the T2000 server or a special time server. This scheme is applicable in networks that require a high accuracy with regard to time.

4.12.2 Synchronizing the NE Time with the T2000 Server Automatically

The NE time can be automatically synchronized with the T2000 server time. In this way, the time of alarms and logs can be correctly recorded in the T2000.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NTP service must not be configured for the T2000 and NEs.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click the double-right-arrow button (red).

Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 4 Set the Synchronous Mode to NM and click Apply.

Page 76: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 5 Set the Synchronization Starting Time and Synchronization Period (days) in the lower pane. Click Apply.

The Synchronization Starting Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

----End

4.12.3 Synchronizing the NE Time with the T2000 Server Manually

In the case of NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, you need to check whether the NE time is consistent with the T2000 server time, so that the T2000 can correctly record the time of alarm generation. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of the T2000 server.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background Information Synchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE time, verify that the system time on the T2000 server is correct. If you want to change the system time, exit the T2000 to reset the time and then start the T2000 again.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click .

Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 4 Select one or more NEs in the list, right-click and choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Click Yes in the Time Synchronization Operation prompt box. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

4.12.4 Configuring the Standard NTP Key On the T2000, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To ensure that a reliable server is accessed, the NTP authentication function must be started. In this case, you need to set the key and password, which are authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

Page 77: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-43

Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Click Standard

NTP Key Management tab.

Step 2 In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click the double-right-arrow button (red).

Step 3 Click Add and the Add Key and Password dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Select the NE in the NE List pane, set Key and Password, and set Trusted to Yes. Then, click Apply.

Step 5 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

----End

4.12.5 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time

You can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The key and password of an NE must be set by using the standard NTP key management

function. The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

Context After you change the value of Synchronous Mode from NULL to Standard NTP, when the modification is delivered to the NE, the time synchronization may be successful though the encryption key is incorrect.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Object Tree, select an NE and click the double-right-arrow button (red).

Step 3 Set the Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.

Step 4 Set the Standard NTP Authentication to Enabled.

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 In the pane at the bottom of the window, right-click, and choose New from the shortcut menu to create a standard NTP server.

If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to NE ID, enter the NE ID of the standard NTP server and Standard NTP Server Key.

If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to IP, enter the IP address of the standard NTP server and the Standard NTP Server Key.

Step 7 Click Apply to synchronize the NE time.

Page 78: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

----End

4.13 Parameters Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.

4.13.1 Parameters: Laser Spectrum Analysis

The laser spectrum analysis is used to analyze an optical signal and to obtain parameters such as optical power, central wavelengths and optical signal noise ratios (OSNRs) of the optical paths. You can use this function to determine the transmission quality of the current optical signal. In this user interface, you can query and print the spectrum analysis result of the optical signal.

4.13.2 Parameters: Wavelength Monitoring Management

Wavelength monitoring boards such as the WMU can monitor wavelengths transmitted from the optical ports at the WDM side of the OTU boards (including service convergence units). In this user interface, you can query and set the wavelength monitoring.

4.13.3 Parameters: Orderwire Board Settings

In this user interface, you can set the orderwire board before running the equipment. The setting options contain orderwire board settings, settings for the first orderwire phone, and settings for the second orderwire phone.

4.13.4 Parameters: General

In this user interface, you can set orderwire phone before running the equipment. You can set call waiting time, dialing mode, conference call number, one to three orderwire phone number, and orderwire phone port.

4.13.5 Parameters: Conference Call

In this user interface, you can query and set the use mode of conference call at an NE, query and set conference call attributes, and select a conference call port.

4.13.6 Parameters: Auxiliary

In this user interface, you can query and set auxiliary parameters.

4.13.7 Parameters: Attributes of NEs

In this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and IP address.

4.13.8 Parameters: Attributes of NE Users

In this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.

4.13.9 Parameters: NE Time Synchronization

In this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the T2000 server time.

4.13.10 Parameters: Standard NTP Key Management

In this user interface, you can manage standard NTP keys.

Page 79: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-45

4.13.11 Parameters: Path Binding

In this user interface, you can configure or query the path binding.

4.13.1 Parameters: Laser Spectrum Analysis The laser spectrum analysis is used to analyze an optical signal and to obtain parameters such as optical power, central wavelengths and optical signal noise ratios (OSNRs) of the optical paths. You can use this function to determine the transmission quality of the current optical signal. In this user interface, you can query and print the spectrum analysis result of the optical signal.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Port Number For example: NE185-10-MCA-2(R02)

Displays the port number of each path of the spectrum analysis board.

Compensation Power (dBm) Range: -10 to +30. For example: 20

Due to the factors such as the coupling ratio and optical board attenuation of the spectrum analysis board, the optical power value of each path after analysis has a fixed deviation from the actual value. You can set this field to keep consistency between the analysis value and the actual one.

Page 80: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Spectrum Data Wavelength No, Standard Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz), Central Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz), Wavelength Deviation (nm), Optical Power (dBm), OSNR(dB)

Displays the result of the optical performance data after spectrum analysis. Wavelength No: indicates the wavelength No. of each optical path. Standard Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz): indicates the standard central wavelength of the optical path. Central Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz): indicates the actual central wavelength of the optical path. Wavelength Deviation (nm): deviation between the standard wavelength and the actual wavelength. Optical Power (dBm): the optical power of the optical path. OSNR(dB): the optical signal noise ratio of the optical path.

Spectrum Waveform None Displays spectrum data in graphics.

Profile None Displays the spectrum profile of the optical signal.

X-Axis Frequency Checked, Unchecked Specifies that the X-axis for the Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform, and Profile represents the frequency.

X-Axis Wavelength Checked, Unchecked Specifies that the X-axis for the Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform, and Profile represents the wavelength.

Automatically query when this window is displayed

Checked, Unchecked Sets whether to automatically query when the window is displayed.

Page 81: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-47

4.13.2 Parameters: Wavelength Monitoring Management Wavelength monitoring boards such as the WMU can monitor wavelengths transmitted from the optical ports at the WDM side of the OTU boards (including service convergence units). In this user interface, you can query and set the wavelength monitoring.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Wavelength Monitoring Unit

For example: OTM1-NE183-5-WMU-1(IN1)

Selects a wavelength monitoring unit.

Wavelength Monitoring Object

For example: OTM1-NE183-2-ETMX-1(IN/OUT)

Displays the wavelength monitored object.

Wavelength For example: C/1/1529.16/196.050

Displays the wavelength of the monitored object.

4.13.3 Parameters: Orderwire Board Settings In this user interface, you can set the orderwire board before running the equipment. The setting options contain orderwire board settings, settings for the first orderwire phone, and settings for the second orderwire phone.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Available Boards

For example: SC1

The boards that can be set as the orderwire board.

Orderwire Board Settings

Selected Board For example: SC1

The board that is selected as the orderwire board.

Available Boards

For example: SC1

The boards that can be set as the first orderwire board.

Settings for the First Orderwire Phone

Selected Board For example: SC1

The board that is selected as the first orderwire board.

Available Boards

For example: SC2

The boards that can be set as the second orderwire board.

Settings for the Second Orderwire Phone Selected Board For example:

SC2 The board that is selected as the second orderwire board.

Page 82: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4.13.4 Parameters: General In this user interface, you can set orderwire phone before running the equipment. You can set call waiting time, dialing mode, conference call number, one to three orderwire phone number, and orderwire phone port.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Call Waiting Time(s) 1-9 Default: 9

The Call Waiting Time(s) parameter specifies the timeout period of searching an orderwire route. If the period of searching an orderwire route exceeds the specified value, the orderwire phone changes to the busy tone status. Click Call Waiting Time(s) for more information.

Dialing Mode Pulse, Dual-Tone Frequency Default: Dual-Tone Frequency

Displays the orderwire dialing mode.

Conference Call 100-99999999 Default: 999

The Conference Call parameter specifies the phone numbers of networkwide orderwire calls.Click Conference Call for more information.

Phone 1, Phone 2, Phone 3 100-99999999 The Phone parameter specifies the phone numbers of orderwire addressing calls. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. The overhead supports a maximum of 3-channel orderwire phone number. As some of the equipments support Phone1 only, Phone2 and Phone3 are not available.When the value is null, after the configuration is delivered, the corresponding data on NEs remains unchanged instead of being cleared. Click Phone for more information.

Page 83: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-49

Field Value Description

Selected Orderwire Port For example: 12-SC2-1 Selects the line board port for orderwire transmission.

Available Orderwire Port Available Orderwire Port Default: Bid-BidType-PortID

The Available Orderwire Port parameter specifies whether the optical interface is used to make orderwire calls. Click Available Orderwire Port for more information.

4.13.5 Parameters: Conference Call In this user interface, you can query and set the use mode of conference call at an NE, query and set conference call attributes, and select a conference call port.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Conference Call Authorities Able to Listen and Speak, Able to Listen but not Speak

Default: Able to Listen and Speak

Displays or sets the conference call authorities. NOTE

Able to Listen and Speak: The user of the conference call can either hear the voices from other phones in the networkwide conference call or let other phone users hear his own voice.

Able to Listen but not Speak: The user of the conference call can only hear the voices from other phones in the networkwide conference call but cannot let other phone users hear his own voice.

Selected Conference Call Port

For example: 12-SC2-1 The optical ports in this list are used for conference call.

Available Conference Call Port

Available Orderwire Port Default: Bid-BidType-PortID

The Available Conference Call Port parameter specifies whether the optical interface is used to make conference calls. Click Available Conference Call Port for more information.

Page 84: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4.13.6 Parameters: Auxiliary In this user interface, you can query and set auxiliary parameters.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Subnet No. Length 1, 2 Default: 1

The Subnet No. Length parameter specifies the length of the subnet number of the orderwire subnets if the entire network is divided into multiple orderwire subnets. Click Subnet No. Length for more information.

First Communication Port S1, S2, RS232, RS422 Selects the first data communication port for SDH NNI connection to achieve the communication with the opposite end of the SDH NNI orderwire.

First Phone Port F1 port, Phone2, Phone3 Selects the first phone port for the SDH NNI orderwire.

Second Communication Port S1, S2, RS232, RS422 Selects the second data communication port for SDH NNI connection to achieve the communication with the opposite end of the SDH NNI orderwire. The first and second SDH NNI connections are independent of each other.

Second Phone Port F1 port, Phone2, Phone3 Selects the second phone port for the SDH NNI orderwire.

4.13.7 Parameters: Attributes of NEs In this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and IP address.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Type For example: OptiX OSN 3800

Displays the type of an NE.

Page 85: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-51

Field Value Description

ID For example: 1 Displays the unique ID of an NE on the NM for identifying an NE, which is the basis of communication between the NM and an NE.

New ID For example: 1 Set the new ID of an NE on the NM for identifying an NE, which is the basis of communication between the NM and an NE.

Extended ID 1 to 255 Default: 9

For NE ID extension. Click Extended ID for more information.

New Extended ID 1 to 255 Default: 9

Set the new extended ID of an NE,For NE ID extension.

Name For example: NE70 Displays the NE name, for the convenience of searching for the NE.

Remarks Character string. Enters extra notes of the NE if desired.

Subrack Type Standard Subrack Displays the subrack type of an NE.

Gateway Type Non-gateway, Gateway The gateway type of an NE decides the mode of communication between the NE and the NM.A gateway NE can communicate with the NM directly, but a non-gateway NE can only communicate with the NM through a gateway NE. The gateway type is set on the basis of physical connection.

Protocol IP, OSI Displays the protocol used for communication between the Gateway NE and the NM.

IP Address For example: 192.168.0.1 Displays the IP of the gateway NE.

Page 86: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Connection Mode Common, Security SSL Displays the mode of connection between the T2000 and the gateway NE. Click Connection Mode (NE Attributes) for more information.

Port Default: 1400 Displays the port of the gateway NE.

Affiliated Gateway IP Address

For example: 10.71.82.94 Selects the address of the GNE to which the created NE is associated.

Affiliated Gateway Port Default: 1400 Displays the port of the GNE to which an NE is associated.

Affiliated Gateway For example: NE181 When you are creating a Non-Gateway NE, you can select a created gateway NE as its affiliated GNE here.

Created On Format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS

Displays the time when the NE is created.

Affiliated Gateway Protocol IP Displays the protocol used for communication between the affiliated Gateway NE and the NM.

NE user For example: root The NE name is used when logging in to the NE. Before the NE is configured, use the internally reserved user name root for login.

Password For example: password Corresponds to the above NE user password. The corresponding password for the reserved user root is password.

4.13.8 Parameters: Attributes of NE Users In this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.

Page 87: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-53

Parameters

Field Value Description

NE For example: NE70 The operation object selected.

NE user Up to 8 characters can be supported.

The name of NE user. Click NE User (NE User Management) for more information.

User Level Monitor level, Operation level, Maintenance level, System level, Debug level

The operations carried out by the NE user are classified into five levels, namely monitor level, operation level, maintenance level, system level and debug level from the lowest level to the highest. Each user of higher level can perform all the functions that a lower level user can do. For example, a operation level user has all the rights processed by a monitor level user. The detailed right settings for each level are:

Monitor level: all query commands, log in/out, and modification of its own password

Operation level: all settings for fault and performance, partial security settings, and partial configuration

Maintenance level: partial security settings, partial configuration, communication settings, and log management

System level: all security settings, all configuration.

Debug level: all security settings, all configuration, and all debug commands

Click User Level (NE User Management) for more information.

Page 88: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

NE User Flag LCT NE user, EMS NE user, CMD NE user, General NE user

Different NE users are used for logging in to NEs through different network management systems. LCT NE user: NE user used when NEs are managed by LCT. EMS NE user: NE user used when NEs are managed by EMS. CMD NE user: NE user used when NEs are managed by CMD. General NE user: NE user used when NEs are managed by the network management system of any type. Click NE User Flag (NE User Management) for more information.

User Group Belonged Administrator User Group, Super Administrator User Group, Operator User Group, Monitor User Group, Maintainer User Group

Displays the user group of NE user.

Detailed Description Up to 32 characters can be supported.

Displays the user description.

Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately

Yes, No Sets whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately. This setting is supported only for release 5.0 NEs.

Time of Canceling User Automatically(m)

5-60, Disable Specifies the time that will elapse before the NE user automatically logs out.

User Valid Till(days) 1-999, Not overdue Specifies the number of the days that the NE user will be valid for.

Password Valid Till(days) 1-999, Not overdue Specifies the number of the days that the NE user password will be valid for.

Isonline Yes, No Specifies whether the NE user is online.

Page 89: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-55

4.13.9 Parameters: NE Time Synchronization In this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the T2000 server time.

Parameters

Field Value Description

NM Time Format: dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss

Displays the time of the T2000 server in real time.

NE Name For example: NE1 Displays the name of the NE.

NE ID Format: Extended ID-ID

Displays the ID of the NE.

Synchronous Mode Standard NTP, NM, NULL

Displays the synchronization mode of NE Time. Click Synchronous Mode (NE Time Synchronization) for more information.

Standard NTP Authentication Enabled, Disabled Displays or sets whether the standard NTP authentication is enabled. Click Standard NTP Authentication for more information.

Page 90: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Server Enabled ECC Server, Disabled Displays or sets whether to set it to the NTP server and the type of the NTP server. When the ECC protocol is used for communication between NEs, the gateway NE is an ECC server. So, the Server Enabled parameter is set to ECC Server. While non-gateway NEs are ECC clients and the Server Enabled parameter is set to Disabled. When the IP protocol is used for communication between NEs, all NEs are IP clients and the Server Enabled parameter is set to Disabled.

Client Enabled ECC Client, IP Client, Disabled

Displays or sets whether to set it to the NTP client and the type of the NTP client. When the IP protocol is used for communication between the NE and the NTP server, the NE is an IP client and the Client Enabled parameter are set to IP Client.

Synchronous Server NE ID, IP address Displays or sets the IP address or NE ID of the NTP synchronous server. If the client type is ECC Client, set it to the NE ID of the synchronous server. If the client type is IP Client, set it to the IP address of the synchronous server.

Page 91: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-57

Field Value Description

Polling Period (min) 2 to 1440 Minutes Displays the period of synchronizing the NE time with the NTP server time.

The Number of Sampling 1 to 8 It indicates how many times the NTP server time will be sampled in a querying cycle. The NTP server time is the average of that sampled.

NE Current Time Format: dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss

Displays the current time of the NE.

Recent NE Synchronization Time Format: dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss

The latest time when the NE was synchronized. If the difference between the current NE time and the latest time when the NE was synchronized is within two querying cycles, it indicates the NTP server is running normally. Otherwise, it indicates the NTP server is not running normally, and the color of the parameter box will change to the one that is for "Major Alarm".

Set Auto Synchronization Parameter

Synchronization Starting Time

Format: dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss

Sets the start time of synchronizing the NE time with the NM time. Applied only when the NE time is synchronized with the NM time.

Page 92: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Synchronization Period (days)

1 to 300 Default: 1

Sets the cycle of automatically synchronizing the NE time with the NM time. Applied only when the NE time is synchronized with the NM time. Click Synchronization Period (days) (NE Time Synchronization) for more information.

Standard NTP Server Identifier NE ID, IP Sets the identifier of the NE. Click Standard NTP Server Identifier for more information.

Standard NTP Server For example: 1-1 or 129.9.0.1

Sets the ID or IP address of the standard NTP server.

Standard NTP Server Key 0 to 1024 Sets the key of the standard NTP server.

4.13.10 Parameters: Standard NTP Key Management In this user interface, you can manage standard NTP keys.

Parameters

Field Value Description

NE Name For example: oadm1-NE112

Displays the name of an NE.

NE ID For example: 9-112 Displays the NE ID. Click NE ID for more information.

Key 1 to 1024 Sets the key number. When you create keys in batches, you can enter the key numbers in the a-b format or use a comma to separate the numbers. For example, if you create four keys whose numbers are 1, 2, 3, 4, you can enter the key number as 1-4, or "1,2,3,4".

Password 6 to 16 characters Specifies the password that contains at least a numeral and a letter.

Page 93: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-59

Field Value Description

Trusted Yes, No If you select No, when NEs synchronize clocks, the NEs verify the key and the key is untrusted. Hence, the clock of the NE cannot be synchronized with the standard NTP server.

4.13.11 Parameters: Path Binding In this user interface, you can configure or query the path binding.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Port For example, NE832-12-TDX-151(IMP1/IMP1)

Displays available optical interfaces.

Direction Uplink, Downlink Displays the sink of Ethernet services.

Path Binding ODU1 (1, 2, 3, 4) Displays the bound paths.

Binding Path Count 1, 2, 3, 4 Displays the number of bound paths.

Slot ID For example, 12-TDX Displays the board that realizes path binding.

Port ID For example, 151(IMP1/IMP1)

Displays ports available for the board.

Available Bound Path For example, ODU1-1 Displays available paths.

Selected Bound Path For example, ODU1-1 Displays the selected paths. NOTE

The bound path ODU1-1 is required.

4.14 Parameters: WDM Interface In this window, you can configure the WDM interface.

On the right side of the WDM interface, there are four domains from the top down:

The first field provides two option buttons (By Board/Port (Channel) and By Function) that are used to select the attribute classification mode.

Page 94: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

The second field specifies the object that needs to be set after the classification, which varies with the first field.

The third field specifies attributes, which vary with the second field. Double-click or select to set attributes (for attribute description, refer to the parameter descriptions of different boards).

The last field provides two buttons at the bottom: Query and Apply. Before setting, you can click Query to query the board attribute from the NE and after setting you need to click Apply to send the configurations.

4.14.1 Parameters: Optical Transponder Board

In this user interface, you can set parameters for optical transponder boards. The parameters are laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.

4.14.2 Parameters: Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

In this user interface, you can set and query the attenuation rate of a port, the fixed band, and the parity of the working band.

4.14.3 Parameters: Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board

In this user interface, you can set and query the added/dropped wavelengths for optical add and drop multiplex boards.

4.14.4 Parameters: Tributary and Line Boards

In this user interface, you can set parameters for tributary and line board boards, such as laser status, automatic laser shutdown and path use status.

4.14.5 Parameters: Optical Amplifier Board

In this user interface, you can set or query parameters of optical amplifier boards.

4.14.6 Parameters:Optical Supervisory Channel Board

In this user interface, you can set laser status and loopback, and query the wavelengths of an optical port.

4.14.7 Parameters: Protection Board

In this user interface, you can set parameters for protection boards. The parameters are laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.

4.14.8 Parameters: Spectrum Analysis Board

In this user interface, you can set working wavelengths for spectrum analysis boards. For example, you can set parity of working band and fixed band.

4.14.9 Parameters: Variable Optical Attenuation Board

In this user interface, you can set the maximum or minimum attenuation rate for optical ports and path use status. You can set or query parameters related to working wavelengths, including fixed band and the parity of working band.

4.14.10 Parameters: Dispersion Compensation Board

In this user interface, you can query parameters for dispersion compensation boards.

Page 95: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-61

4.14.1 Parameters: Optical Transponder Board In this user interface, you can set parameters for optical transponder boards. The parameters are laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical interface number(Optical interface name)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: IN/OUT Displays the default names. Do not modify this field.

Laser Status Open, Close Default: Open

Sets the status of a laser. Click Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Automatic Laser Shutdown Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Sets whether to shut down the laser automatically or not. If auto-shutdown is set, when the received signal is lost, the laser shuts down automatically, so that the laser service life is extended and body injury is avoided. Click Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information.

Service Type For example: SDH, SONET, OTU1, OTU2, 10GE(LAN), OFRAME, FC10G Default: SDH

Queries or sets the service type of the client side. Click Service Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Port Mapping Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Encapsulated to FEC5G, Encapsulated to OTU5G

Displays the flow control mode of a trail to which that services at this port are mapped. Click Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.

MISCODE Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the FC service scrambles. This parameter is applicable to the 12LOM board.

Page 96: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Client Service Bearer Rate (M)

The transmission rate of the client-side service varies according to different OTU boards as follows:

100 to 2500 (applicable to the LDMS, LDMD, 12LDM, 12LQMS, 12LQMD, 13LQM, and TOM boards)

100 to 5000 (applicable to the 12LOM board)

16 to 2500 (applicable to other OTU boards)

Default: 2500

Displays the rate range of client services that the equipment can bear. Click Client Side Service Bearer Rate (M) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Service Mode SDH, OTN Default: OTN

Sets the service mode for a port. Click Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Client Rate (bit/s) 155M, 622M, 2.5G Default: 155M

Sets the rate of accessing services at the optical interface on the client side of a board. Click Client Rate (bit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Current Bearer Rate (M) 0 to 65535 Queries the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for such OTUs at any rate Click Current Bearer Ratio (M) (WDM Interface) for more information.

LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled

Enables or disables the LPT function for an EPL service.Click LPT Enabling (WDM Interface) for more information.

FC Internal Working Mode Normal Mode, Special Mode

Sets the FC internal working mode.

Timeslot Allocation Mode Manual, Automatic Sets the timeslot allocation mode.

Page 97: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-63

Field Value Description

Channel Use Status Used, Unused Default: Used

Sets whether to use the channel or not. Click Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop

Sets loopback according to the port of the OTU board.

AIS Insertion in the ODU Layer

Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled

Sets whether to insert AIS or not. Click AIS Insertion in the ODU Layer (WDM Interface) for more information.

LCK Insertion in the ODU Layer

Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled

Sets whether to insert LCK or not. Click LCK Insertion in the ODU Layer (WDM Interface) for more information.

OCI Insertion in the ODU Layer

Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled

Sets whether to insert OCI or not. Click OCI Insertion in the ODU Layer (WDM Interface) for more information.

Max. Bearer Ratio (M) 34 to 2700 Displays the maximum traffic that can be processed.Click Max. Bearer Ratio (M) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Min. Bearer Ratio (M) 34 to 2700 Displays the minimum traffic that can be processed.Click Min. Bearer Ratio (M) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Rate band (M) 34 to 2700 Sets the rate of transmission for this optical port. Click Ratio band (M) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Page 98: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Default: Enable

Sets whether the board performs FEC processing on data. Click FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.

FEC Mode FEC, AFEC Default: AFEC

Sets the type of FEC. Click FEC Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

VOA Supported Support, Not Support Default: Not Support

Sets whether to support VOA or not. Click VOA Supported (WDM Interface) for more information.

PAUSE Frame Flow Control Enable, Disable Default: Enable

Click PAUSE Frame Flow Control (WDM Interface) for more information.

Wavelength No./ Optical Interface Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example: C/1/1560.61/192.10

Displays the working wavelength of the optical port.

Max. Packet Length 1518 to 65535 Sets the maximum packet length of the data, and any packet exceeding this length is discarded. Click Maximum Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.

Auto-Negotiation Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled

Sets whether to perform port auto-negotiation. Click Auto-Negotiation (WDM Interface) for more information.

Board Receiving/Transmitting Attributes

Single fed and single receiving, dual fed and selective receiving

Displays the receiving/transmitting attributes of board. Click Board Receiving/Transmitting Attributes (WDM Interface) for more information.

Page 99: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-65

Field Value Description

Board Tracing Clock Source Local Clock Source, Line Clock Source Default: Local Clock Source

Sets the tracing clock source of the board. Click Board Tracing Clock Source (WDM Interface) for more information.

ESC Auxiliary Switch Disable, Enable Default: Enable

Sets status of the ESC auxiliary switch. Click ESC Auxiliary Switch (WDM Interface) for more information.

Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

For example: 1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port that you configure. Click Configure Wavelength No./Optical Interface Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Planned Band Type L, RAMAN_C, C Plus, CWDM, C, C(320G), C192, SMC, RAMAN_L, C+L

Sets the band of the working wavelength. If the board supports the band that you configure, the actual band type is the same as the configured band type. Click Configure Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (Thz)

For example: 1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the actual working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Displays the band of the current working wavelength.

Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example: 1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port that you configure.

Configure Band Type C, CWDM Sets the band of the working wavelength. If the board supports the band that you configure, the actual band type is the same as the configured band type.

Page 100: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Half-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex Default: 1000M Full-Duplex

Displays the working modes of the Ethernet port. Auto-Negotiation can automatically determine the optimized working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. During configuration, make sure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent. If the working modes are different, the services are down. Click Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

PRBS Test Status Disabled, Enabled Default: Disable

Sets the PRBS status of the tributary board. Click PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Remarks - -

SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_TCM1_DEG, ODUk_TCM2_DEG, ODUk_TCM3_DEG, ODUk_TCM4_DEG, ODUk_TCM5_DEG, ODUk_TCM6_DEG

Sets the SD switching condition. Values of parameters vary with different boards and products.

FC Distance Extension Enabled, Disabled Displays whether the FC distance extension is enabled.

Cross-Connect Loopback Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

In the LWM and LWX boards, broadcasts optical signals received by the client side to optical transmission modules of the client side and WDM side, or broadcasts optical signals received by the WDM side to optical transmission modules of the WDM side and client side. Click Cross-Connect Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.

Page 101: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-67

Field Value Description

Ingress Rate(kbps) 64 to 1250 Displays the ingress rate.

Egress Rate(kbps) 64 to 1250 Displays the egress rate.

Port Work Mode For example: OSC Mode Displays the working mode of the optical interface of a board. Working mode of the optical interface varies with the board mode.

Board Mode For example: Eight OSCs Convergence

A board-level attribute of general configuration. You can manage boards by switching the mode.

Non-Intrusive Monitoring Status

Enabled, Disabled Sets the non-intrusive monitoring status.

ESC Supervisory Channel Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to combine ESC monitoring signals.

Protocol Type Normal, Enhanced Sets the protocol type of the channel. Normal indicates lower transmission rate. Enhanced indicates higher transmission rate and supports transmitting E1 services.

Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

For example: C/1/1529.16/196.050

Displays the information of the optical port, including band type, wavelength number, wavelength and frequency. Click Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Band Type C, L, Cband(320G) Displays the band type of the optical port. Click Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Page 102: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Optical Interface Status IS-NR, OOS-AU, OOS-MA, OOS-AUMA, IS-NR, LPBK, OOS-AU, LPBK, OOS-MA, LPBK, OOS-AUMA, LPBK

Displays the status of this optical interface. IS-NR

IS: In Service NR: Normal

The channel of the board is able and permitted to provide all its prescribed functions. OOS-AU

OSS: Out Of Service AU: Autonomous

The channel of the board cannot provide any of its prescribed functions because an alarm or performance event occurs on the current NE. This state is not caused by any restriction of the current external management. OSS-MA

OSS: Out Of Service MA: Management

The channel of the board cannot provide any of its prescribed functions because these functions are manually suspended by an external command. In this state, the channel of the board still can provide its prescribed functions although these functions are currently suspended. The transition from IS to OOS is caused by the external command. OSS-AUMA

OSS: Out Of Service AUMA: Autonomous-and-Management

The channel of the board cannot provide any of its prescribed functions because these functions are disabled by an alarm or performance event that occurs on the NE and manually suspended by an external command. IS-NR: indicates that the channel of the board is in IS-NR state and loopback state. OSS AU: indicates that the

Page 103: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-69

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

4.14.2 Parameters: Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board In this user interface, you can set and query the attenuation rate of a port, the fixed band, and the parity of the working band.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-1-M40-1(OUT)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: OUT Displays default names. Do not modify this field.

Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Sets the actual attenuation ratio of the optical port. Click Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 The maximum attenuation rate allowed. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too low, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Click Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface-Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit) for more information.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 The minimum attenuation rate allowed. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too high, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to decrease. Click Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Page 104: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Fixed Band Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Parity of the Working band Odd, Even, FULL Default: FULL

Displays the parity of the working band. Click Parity of the Working Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Actual Band C Displays the actual working band of the multiplexer and demultiplexer board.

Configure Band C Displays the working band that you configure.

Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

For example: -50 The power that is smaller than this value cannot be determined. Click Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface-Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit) for more information.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Sets the parity of the working band for a port.

Configure Working Band Parity

Even, Odd Sets the parity of the working band for a port.

PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km))

0.00 to 1.00 Sets PMD coefficient.

Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient (ps/(nm*km))

-15.00 to 30.00 Sets chromatic dispersion coefficient.

Channel Number Mode C40 Mode, C80 Mode, CWDM Mode

Sets and queried the channel number mode for the calculation of the resource utilization.

DCM Dispersion Compensation Direction

Send, Receive Set DCM dispersion compensation direction.

DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)

1.0 to 6500.0 Set DCM dispersion compensation value.

Page 105: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-71

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

4.14.3 Parameters: Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board In this user interface, you can set and query the added/dropped wavelengths for optical add and drop multiplex boards.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE711-15-MR2-1(A1/D1)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: A1/D1 Displays default names. Do not modify this field.

Band Type/Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THZ)

C: 1529.16/196.05 to 1560.61/192.10 L: 1570.42/190.90 to 1603.57/186.95 C(320G): 1535.82/195.20 to 1560.61/192.10 CWDM: 1471 to 1611

Queries the added/dropped wavelength of the board. It is applicable to MR2 and MB2.Click Band Type/Wavelength NO./Add-Drop Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Band Type C+L, C, L, C(320G), CWDM Default: C

Queries the waveband type. Click Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Actual Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example: 1/1529.56/196.000

Queries the added/dropped wavelength of the board. It is applicable to CMR2 and CMR4.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Queries the actual waveband type.

Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example: 1/1529.56/196.000

Sets the add and drop wavelength for a board.

Configure Band Type C, CWDM Sets the band type.

Add/Drop Wave Band 1 to 40 Displays the add/drop wave band. Click Actual Add/Drop Wave Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Page 106: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Actual Working Band Parity Odd, Even, All Displays the parity of the actual working band.

Configure Working Band Parity

Odd, Even, All Sets the parity of the working band.

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

4.14.4 Parameters: Tributary and Line Boards In this user interface, you can set parameters for tributary and line board boards, such as laser status, automatic laser shutdown and path use status.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE125-3-NS2-1(IN/OUT)-2

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: IN/OUT Displays the default names. Do not modify this field.

Laser Status Open, Close Sets the status of a laser.

Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to shut down the laser automatically or not. If auto-shutdown is set, when the received signal is lost, the laser will shut down automatically, so that the laser service life is extended and body injury is avoided.

Service Type For example: STM-64 Sets the service type of the client side.

LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the LPT function for an EPL service.Click LPT Enabling (WDM Interface) for more information.

Path Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the path or not.

Page 107: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-73

Field Value Description

Optical Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop

Sets loopback according to the port of the board.

FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Sets whether the board performs FEC processing on data. Click FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.

FEC Type FEC, AFEC Sets the FEC type.

Wavelength No./Optical Interface Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example: 1/1560.61/192.10

Working wavelength of the optical port.

Max. Packet Length 1518 to 65535 Sets the maximum packet length of the data, and any packet exceeding this length will be discarded.

Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop

Sets loopback according to the path.

Optical Interface Status IS-NR, OOS-AU, OOS-MA, OOS-AUMA, IS-NR, LPBK, OOS-AU, LPBK, OOS-MA, LPBK, OOS-AUMA, LPBK

Displays the status of this optical interface.

Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (Thz)

For example: 1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the actual working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Displays the band of the current working wavelength.

Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example: 1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port that you configure.

Configure Band Type C, CWDM Set the band of the working wavelength. If the board supports the band that you configure, the actual band type is the same as the configured band type.

OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission

Enabled, Disabled Sets whether performs OTN overhead transparent transmission for the board.

Page 108: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Working Mode Autosensing, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full-duplex, 100 Mbit/s half-duplex, 100 Mbit/s full-duplex,1000 Mbit/s half-duplex, 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex0

Working modes of the Ethernet port. The autosensing mode is recommended, because it can automatically find out the best working mode to combine a port and its interconnected port and thus is convenient for maintenance. and thus is convenient for maintenance.The port and its interconnected port must have the same settings of working mode. Otherwise, this results in the failure of services.

Line Rate Standard Mode, Speedup Mode

Sets the rate of the line-side port on the board.

SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG

Sets SD trigger condition.

PMD Threshold(ps) For example: 50 Displays the PMD threshold of the board.

OFC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable the OFC function. This parameter can be edited only when you set Service Type to ISC 1G or ISC 2G, and set Automatic Laser Shutdown and LPT Enabled to Disabled.

4.14.5 Parameters: Optical Amplifier Board In this user interface, you can set or query parameters of optical amplifier boards.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical interface number (Optical interface name)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: IN1 Displays default names. Do not modify this field.

Page 109: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-75

Field Value Description

Optical Amplifier Gain (dB) 20 to 40 The gain of the optical booster amplifier is the ratio of output power to input power.

Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

0 to 20 Set the attenuation ratio of the optical port.

Laser Status Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Sets the on/off status of a laser. Click Laser Status (WDM Interface-Optical Amplifying Unit) for more information.

Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 to 30 Default: 0

The actual attenuation ratio of the optical port, which can be obtained through query. Click Attenuation Ratio (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Gain (dB) 20 to 40 Displays the actual gain for an optical amplifier board. The actual gain is the ratio of the output power to the input power. Click Gain (WDM Interface) for more information.

Gain Slope (dB) For example: 2.5 Displays the actual gain slope of the optical booster amplifier.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 15.0 The maximum attenuation rate of the optical port. If this value is exceeded, the quality of optical signals or signals of the next station degrades due to low power. Click Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Page 110: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 0.5 The minimum attenuation rate of the optical port. If this value is exceeded, the quality of optical signals or signals of the next station degrades due to high power.Click Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Fixed Band Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

The default value is usually used. Click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Nominal Gain Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Query the nominal gain of this optical amplifier. Click Nominal Gain (WDM Interface) for more information.

Synthesized Input Optical Power Loss Threshold(dBm)

-35.0 to -10.0 Sets the threshold of the synthesized input optical power loss. When the synthesized input optical power is below this value, the loss of input signals occurs. Click Synthesized Input Optical Power Loss Threshold(dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Board Work Type C, L, C+L Queries and sets the board work type. Click Board Working Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Actual Band For example: C Displays the actual working band.

Configure Band For example: C Displays the working band that you configure.

Page 111: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-77

Field Value Description

Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

For example: 35 Displays the upper threshold of the gain of the optical amplifier board. Click Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

For example: 10 Displays the lower threshold of the gain of the optical amplifier board. Click Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd, All Displays the parity of the actual working band. Click Parity of the Working Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Parity of the Working Band ODD, EVEN, FULL Sets the parity of the working band.

Rated Optical Power(dBm) -30.0 to 30.0 Default:

Input interface: -19 Output interface: 4

Sets the rated optical power of the input or output port of an optical amplifier board. Click Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Output Lockout Mode Gain Lockout, Power Lockout, ASE, APC

Sets the output lockout mode.

Forced Emitting Power(dBm)

For example: 20.0 Sets the forced launched optical power.

Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm)

5.0 to 30.0 Displays the fixed pump optical power. The value is in the range of Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power and Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power.

Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm)

For example: 6.0 Displays the minimum fixed pump optical power that is queried from the NE.

Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm)

For example: 28.0 Displays the maximum fixed pump optical power that is queried from the NE.

Page 112: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Pump Optical Amplification Card Status

Online, Offline Displays whether the pump optical amplification card is online.

Pump Optical Amplification Card Working Status

Disabled, Enabled Sets the working status of the pump optical amplification card.

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

4.14.6 Parameters:Optical Supervisory Channel Board In this user interface, you can set laser status and loopback, and query the wavelengths of an optical port.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE711-6-SC2-1(RM1/TM1)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: RM1/TM1 Displays default names. Do not modify this field.

Laser Status Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Sets whether the laser is enabled. Applicable to the boards such as HSC1, SC1, or SC2.Click Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Port Enabled Enable, Disable Enables or disables the use of this optical port.

Wavelength Adjustable Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the wavelength adjustable function.

Page 113: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-79

Field Value Description

Return Clock West clock, East clock Set the return clock source. In the case of the optical supervisory channel board with dual optical interfaces, such as SC2, you set the optical interface that returns the clock to the SCC board. In the case of the west clock, the optical interface 1 is used. In the case of the east clock, the optical interface 2 is used.

FE Transparent Transmission

Enable, Disable Enables or disables the FE transparent transmission function.

Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback

Performs corresponding loopback settings for debugging or fault localization. Click Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.

Channel Use Status Used, Unused Default: Used

Sets whether to use the channel or not. Click Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (Thz)

For example: SMC/240/1510.00/198.54

Displays the band type, working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port. Click Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (Thz)

For example: 240/1510.00/198.54

Displays the actual working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Displays the band of the current working wavelength.

Page 114: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

4.14.7 Parameters: Protection Board In this user interface, you can set parameters for protection boards. The parameters are laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE185-6-OLP-2(RI1/TO1)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: RI1/TO1 Displays the default names. Do not modify this field.

Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Sets the threshold of the optical power loss. When the input optical power is below this value, the loss of input signals occurs. Click Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

-10.0 to 10.0 Sets the initial variance value between primary and secondary input power. Click Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

3.0 to 8.0 Sets the variance threshold between primary and secondary input power. Click Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

Page 115: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-81

4.14.8 Parameters: Spectrum Analysis Board In this user interface, you can set working wavelengths for spectrum analysis boards. For example, you can set parity of working band and fixed band.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-10-MCA-1(RO1)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: RO1 Displays default names. Do not modify this field.

Optical Monitoring Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled

Used to set the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface.

Fixed Band Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Usually use default value. Click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Parity of the Working band FULL, Odd, Even Default: FULL

Displays the parity of the working band. Click Parity of the Working Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Wavelength Monitor Status Monitored, Unmonitored Default: Unmonitored

Sets whether to monitor this port. Click Wavelength Monitor Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

WDM System Mode NRZ Or DRZ System, CRZ System(100GHz Alternation), CRZ System(50GHz Alternation), 40Gbps System(100GHz Alternation), 40Gbps System(50GHz Alternation)

Sets the WDM system mode.

Actual Band C Displays the current working band of a channel.

Configure Band C Sets the working band for a port.

Page 116: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Displays the parity of the working band for a port.

Configure Working Band Parity

Even, Odd Sets the parity of the working band for a port.

Optical Switch No. 1 to 8 The MCA board can access eight optical signals. To select one optical port to perform spectrum analysis, you need to know the analyzed optical port No. of the board, that is, the optical switch status or the optical switch number. Click Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) for more information.

Monitor Interval (min) 5 to 49995 Default: 10

Sets the time interval of performance monitoring on the board. Click Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) for more information.

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

4.14.9 Parameters: Variable Optical Attenuation Board In this user interface, you can set the maximum or minimum attenuation rate for optical ports and path use status. You can set or query parameters related to working wavelengths, including fixed band and the parity of working band.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-1-VA4-1(IN1/OUT1)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: IN1/OUT1 Displays default names. Do not modify this field.

Page 117: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 4 Creating a Network

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-83

Field Value Description

Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 to 40 Sets the attenuation ratio of the optical port. Click Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the maximum attenuation rate. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too low, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Click Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the minimum attenuation rate. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too high, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Click Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Channel Use Status Unused, Used Default: Used

Sets whether to use the channel or not. Click Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Fixed Band Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Displays the fixed band. Click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Parity of the Working band FULL, Odd, Even Default: FULL

Displays the parity of the working band. Click Parity of the Working Band (WDM Interface) for more information.

Actual Band C Displays the working band of a channel.

Configure Band C Configures the working band of the port.

Page 118: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

4 Creating a Network OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

4-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

For example: -50 The power that is smaller than this value cannot be determined. Click Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Remarks Sets the remarks of the optical port.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Sets the parity of the working band for a port.

Configure Working Band Parity

Even, Odd Sets the parity of the working band for a port.

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

4.14.10 Parameters: Dispersion Compensation Board In this user interface, you can query parameters for dispersion compensation boards.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE183-35-TDC-1(IN1/OUT1)

Displays the position of this optical interface.

Optical Interface Name For example: IN/OUT Displays the default names. Do not modify this field.

In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.

Page 119: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 5 Performance Management

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

5 Performance Management

About This Chapter To ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenance personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance management measures.

5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold

The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold. According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board, port, or channel. If you have already created a performance threshold template, you can set performance thresholds for one or more boards, ports, or channels at the same time.

5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters

By setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board properly, and starting the performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE or board. This facilitates the performance status monitoring of services and NEs.

5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers

After a network test or fault recovery, you need to reset the performance register to enter a new performance monitoring period. A performance register of the board stores performance data including optical power and bit errors., you need to reset the performance register to enter a new performance monitoring period. A performance register of the board stores performance data including optical power and bit errors.

5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold. According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board, port, or channel. If you have already created a performance threshold template, you can set performance thresholds for one or more boards, ports, or channels at the same time.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Page 120: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

5 Performance Management OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a related card and choose Performance > Performance

Threshold.

Step 2 In the Monitor Object pane, select the desired board, port, or channel.

Step 3 Set performance thresholds according to the requirement.

If you have already created a performance threshold template for the boards, click Use Template and select the desired template. Click Open.

Step 4 Optional: Click Default to restore the default settings.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters By setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board properly, and starting the performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE or board. This facilitates the performance status monitoring of services and NEs.

5.2.1 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board

You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The T2000 monitors the performance of all boards in the network, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.

5.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by maintenance personnel.

5.2.3 Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port

To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data of an Ethernet port.

5.2.1 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The T2000 monitors the performance of all boards in the network, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Page 121: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 5 Performance Management

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Condition drop-down list.

Step 3 Set the Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report and 24-Hour Auto-Report. Click Apply.

Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

----End

5.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by maintenance personnel.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The NE time must be synchronized with the T2000 server time.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Select NEs from the NE list. Click .

Step 3 Select one or more NEs, and set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters according to the requirement.

Page 122: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

5 Performance Management OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

The start time must be later than the current time of the network management system and the end

time must be later than the start time. If the end time is not set, this indicates that the performance monitoring starts from the start time and

does not stop.

Step 4 Click Apply and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

5.2.3 Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data of an Ethernet port.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The Ethernet service must be configured. Refer to Configuring Ethernet Services. The performance monitoring parameters must be set.

Procedure Step 1 Click the Statistics Group tab.

Step 2 Select a port.

Step 3 Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions.

Step 4 Click Start.

Page 123: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 5 Performance Management

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

----End

5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers After a network test or fault recovery, you need to reset the performance register to enter a new performance monitoring period. A performance register of the board stores performance data including optical power and bit errors., you need to reset the performance register to enter a new performance monitoring period. A performance register of the board stores performance data including optical power and bit errors.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

NA WDM series NEs are not supported this function.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance

Register from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the ports and registers that you want to reset and click Reset.

Step 3 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful.

Step 4 Click Close.

----End

Page 124: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)
Page 125: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

About This Chapter 6.1 Basic Concepts

OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function. The T2000 is used to configure the add/drop and the pass-through state of channels, and thus the remote dynamic adjustment of channels is enabled. Optical power equalization can be performed on passthrough and adding wavelengths.

6.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow

This section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming. Before configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network.

6.3 Configuring the ROADM

This section considers project R as an example to describe how to configure the ROADM on the T2000 when the WSS board is used.

6.4 Parameters

Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.

6.1 Basic Concepts OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function. The T2000 is used to configure the add/drop and the pass-through state of channels, and thus the remote dynamic adjustment of channels is enabled. Optical power equalization can be performed on passthrough and adding wavelengths.

There are two schemes supported by the WDM equipment for wavelength allocation:

Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)

FOADM cannot reconfigure the wavelength allocation based on the requirements of service development. The ROADM realizes the reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking or cross-connecting wavelengths, changing the static wavelength allocation to a flexible and dynamic operation. Making use of the ROADM technology, the T2000 software adjusts the

Page 126: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

status of wavelengths (add, drop or pass-through) to realize remote and dynamic adjustment of wavelength status. The adjustment of a maximum of 80 wavelengths is supported.

Optical grooming is the configuration of logical wavelength routes, realized by optical cross-connection. This function meets the user's requirement of managing the services at the optical layer. Products provides flexible optical grooming. When there are changes in the services, users need only to make configuration accordingly on the T2000.

Different nodes adopt different methods of optical grooming. The three main methods are listed as follows:

WSD9 + RMU9 (WSM9): Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for multi-dimensional grooming. It supports the grooming of at most eight dimensions.

WSMD4+WSMD4: Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for the grooming in no more than four dimensions.

ROAM: Applied to common nodes and suitable for two-dimensional grooming.

Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in two transmission directions. Multi-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in multiple transmission directions.

For more details of optical grooming, refer to the Product Description.

6.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow This section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming. Before configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network.

Figure 6-1 Wavelength grooming configuration flow

Configuringthe edge port

Start

End

Creating theboard optical

cross-connections

Creating theSingle-Station optical

cross-connections

Creatingfirbers

Page 127: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

Configuring Mode

Task Name

Task Description

4.9 Creating Fibers

Required If the single-station cross-connection is configured, the logic fiber connection between NEs and between boards that are inside the NEs must be created on the NM.

10.1.2 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection NOTE

The inter-board service route can be established by creating the single-station optical cross-connection.

10.1.1 Configuring the Edge Port

Optional Configure the edge port before creating the single-station optical cross-connection. Omit this task if the port where the optical cross-connection needs to be configured is a fixed edge port.

9.1.3 Creating Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection NOTE

The intra-board service route can be established by creating the board optical cross-connection.

6.3 Configuring the ROADM This section considers project R as an example to describe how to configure the ROADM on the T2000 when the WSS board is used.

6.3.1 Networking Diagram

Tangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical layer.

6.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and board configuration of the project.

6.3.3 Configuration Process

This section describes the process of configuration between station A and station C. For the configuration of other stations, refer to the description for station C.

6.3.1 Networking Diagram Tangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical layer.

Page 128: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Project R adopts a tangent ring networking that comprises seven ONEs: A, B, C, D, E, F and G. All of the ONEs are OADM stations. Figure 6-2 shows the networking diagram of Project R.

Figure 6-2 Networking diagram of Project R

B

C

D

G

F

A

E

: OADM

In project R, the uni-directional services are allocated as shown in Figure 6-3. There are two services between station B and station C. Between station A and station B, station B and station D, station C and station D, station D and station E, station D and station G there is one service respectively. All of the services are STM-64 services.

Page 129: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

Figure 6-3 Service allocation of Project R

B

C

D

G

F

A

E

W E

NS

WE

6.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and board configuration of the project.

Service Signal Flow Take station A and station C as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical layer in the WSD9+RMU9 mode and the ROAM mode. The wavelength route at station A is shown in Figure 6-4, The wavelength route at station C is shown in Figure 6-5.

Page 130: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Figure 6-4 Services at station A of Project R

WSD9O AIN

EXPO

WSD9IN

O AIN

RMU9

O A

OUT

ROA

IN

RMU9

IN

OUT

DM1 DM1

DM7 DM7

INWSD9

DM1

DM7WSD9

DM1

DM8

AM1

AM8

TOA

AM1

AM8

O A

RMU9O A

EXPIOUT

AM1

AM7

RMU9

OUT

AM1

AM7O A

O A

O A

W E

S N

DM8 DM8

AM8 AM8

DM8

DM7

AM7 AM7

EXPO EXPO

EXPO

ROA

TOA

ROA

TOA

ROA

TOA

EXPI

EXPI EXPI

O A

Page 131: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

Figure 6-5 Services at station C of Project R

ROAM

OD

IN

OUT

DM

EXPI

EXPO

EXPI

EXPO

O A

O A

W

IN

OUTO A

O A

E OD

DM

ROAM

M01 M40

M01 M40M02

M02

Wavelength Allocation Diagram Figure 6-6 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project R.

Figure 6-6 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project R

B CW E W

DWavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) E

1531.90/195.70

1532.68/195.60

1533.47/195.50

D AW S W

EE

1532.68/195.60

D AW N W

FE

1533.47/195.50

AE W

B

1535.82/195.20

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

Page 132: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

6.3.3 Configuration Process This section describes the process of configuration between station A and station C. For the configuration of other stations, refer to the description for station C.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The related boards are configured.

Procedure Step 1 Station A configuration process

1. Click the NE180 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand interface.

2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. Select the corresponding source port and sink port of the optical cross-connect service. Set the pass-through service from west to north at station A for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.

3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select Source Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the

wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths.

Page 133: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical Cross-Connection interface is displayed.

5. Click Apply. 6. Repeat step 2 to step 5 to create the pass-through service from west to south at station A

for the service 10/1532.68/195.60 from station D to station E.

Page 134: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

7. Repeat step 2 to step 5 to create the service added from the east at station A for the service 18/1535.82/195.20 from station A to station B.

8. The created optical cross-connection is displayed in the interface.

Step 2 Station C configuration process

1. Click the NE182 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand interface.

2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. Set the pass-through service from west to east at station C for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.

3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select Source Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the

wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths.

Page 135: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical Cross-Connection interface is displayed.

5. Click Apply. 6. Repeat step 2 to step 5 to create two services dropped from the west at station C for the

services 10/1532.68/195.60 and 8/1531.90/195.70 from station B to station C.

Page 136: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Page 137: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-13

7. Repeat step 2 to step 5 to create the service added from the east at station C for the service 8/1531.90/195.70 from station C to station D.

----End

6.4 Parameters Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.

6.4.1 Parameters: Edge Port

Before creating an optical cross-connection, you need to configure the corresponding port of the board as an edge port.

6.4.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

In this user interface, you can configure optical cross-connections on a single NE. An optical cross-connection refers to the cross-connection at the OCh level that can be dynamically created. An optical cross-connection can realize wavelength grooming. The optical cross-connection is classified into board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. A single-station optical cross-connection refers to the end-to-end optical cross-connection within an NE.

6.4.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection

In this user interface, you can configure optical cross-connections on a board. Optical cross-connection is the cross-connection at OCh level that can be dynamically created. It can implement wavelength grooming. Optical cross-connection contains board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. Board optical cross-connection is the optical cross-connection operations on one board.

Page 138: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

6.4.1 Parameters: Edge Port Before creating an optical cross-connection, you need to configure the corresponding port of the board as an edge port.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Fixed Edge Ports For example: 3-LQMS-1(IN)

Displays the fixed edge port of the NE. By default, the port of the FIU and the port at the OTU line side are fixed edge ports. Click Fixed Edge Port (Optical Cross-Connection Management) for more information.

Available Edge Ports For example: 3-WSM9-1(IN)

Displays available edge ports of the NE. Click Available Edge Port (Optical Cross-Connection Management) for more information.

Selected Edge Ports For example: 4-M40-1(OUT)

Displays the selected edge port of the NE. Click Selected Edge Port (Optical Cross-Connection Management) for more information.

6.4.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection In this user interface, you can configure optical cross-connections on a single NE. An optical cross-connection refers to the cross-connection at the OCh level that can be dynamically created. An optical cross-connection can realize wavelength grooming. The optical cross-connection is classified into board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. A single-station optical cross-connection refers to the end-to-end optical cross-connection within an NE.

Parameters

Table 6-1 Optical cross-connection parameters

Field Value Description

Source Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the source slot of the optical cross-connection.

Page 139: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-15

Field Value Description

Source Port Port No.(port name) Displays the source port of the optical cross-connection.

Source Band C Currently the Metro equipment supports C band.

Source Wavelength For example: 2/1529.56/196.00

Numbers wavelengths sequentially. The value is expressed in the order of "wavelength number/central wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz)" Currently 80 wavelengths in C band are supported.

Sink Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the sink slot of the optical cross-connection.

Sink Port Port No.(port name) Displays the sink port of the optical cross-connection.

Sink Band C Currently the Metro equipment supports C band.

Sink Wavelength For example: 2/1529.56/196.00

Numbers wavelengths sequentially. The value is expressed in the order of "wavelength number/central wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz)" Currently 80 wavelengths in C band are supported.

Service Origin Create Manually, Intelligently Generate

Displays the mode of creating optical cross-connections.

Page 140: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

6-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Power Adjustment Mode Manual, Auto Optical cross-connection power adjustment mode. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing board automatically adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, you need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing board. The Auto option is available for the following types of optical cross-connection trails:

Transparently transmitted service, such as FIU>OAU1>WSM9>OAU1>FIU, OAU1>WSM9>OAU1, FIU>OAU1>WSM9>OAU1 and OAU1>WSM9>OAU1>FIU.

Add service, such as OTU>WSM9>OAU1>FIU, OTU>WSM9>OAU1 and OTU>RUM9>OAU1.

Drop service, such as FIU>OAU1>WSD9>OTU, OAU1>ROAM>D40>OTU and OAU1>WSD9>OTU.

For all the optical cross-connections other than the three types described above, you can only select the Manual mode.

6.4.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection In this user interface, you can configure optical cross-connections on a board. Optical cross-connection is the cross-connection at OCh level that can be dynamically created. It can implement wavelength grooming. Optical cross-connection contains board optical

Page 141: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. Board optical cross-connection is the optical cross-connection operations on one board.

Parameters

Field Value Description

Source Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the source slot of the optical cross-connection.

Source Port Port No.(port name) Displays the source port of the optical cross-connection.

Source Band C Currently the Metro equipment supports C band.

Source Wavelength For example: 2/1529.56/196.00

Numbers wavelengths sequentially. The value is expressed in the order of "wavelength number/central wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz)" Currently 80 wavelengths in C band are supported.

Sink Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the sink slot of the optical cross-connection.

Sink Port Port No.(port name) Displays the sink port of the optical cross-connection.

Sink Band C Currently the Metro equipment supports C band.

Sink Wavelength For example: 2/1529.56/196.00

Numbers wavelengths sequentially. The value is expressed in the order of "wavelength number/central wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz)" Currently 80 wavelengths in C band are supported.

Page 142: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)
Page 143: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

7 Configuring WDM Services

About This Chapter This chapter describes methods of configuring the WDM transparent transmission services.

7.1 Overview

This topic describes the basic concepts of the WDM service configuration.

7.2 Service Type

This topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.

7.3 WDM Service Configuration Flow

This topic describes the configuration process of services. Before configuring the WDM services, complete the basic configurations on the NE following the network creation process.

7.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service

This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the GE service through configuration of the cross-connect service.

7.5 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services

This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SAN services through an example.

7.6 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service

This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the OTN service through configuration of the cross-connect service.

7.7 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services

This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SDH services through an example.

7.8 Parameters

Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

Page 144: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

7.1 Overview This topic describes the basic concepts of the WDM service configuration.

Overview of Cross-Connections The grooming function of electrical cross-connections of WDM equipment helps WDM networks to change from static networks to dynamic networks. Operations, such as pass-through, adding, dropping, loopback, can be performed on each sub-service on any station independently, without affecting the services in other channels. The electrical cross-connection realizes automatic configuration through remote management. No fiber jumper needs to be performed manually. In this manner, the operation cost and the possibility of misoperation are reduced.

Unlike the point-to-point multiplexing channel scheme of traditional WDM MUX/DMUX, the electrical cross-connections are added with, for example, GE and ODUk cross-connections and end-to-end management capability on the basis of the MUX/DMUX. In addition, the electrical cross-connection scheme is different from the ADM scheme that is based on wavelengths. It allows the cross-connection of services between wavelengths, providing service convergence and grooming of different wavelengths.

Electrical cross-connections are classified as follows:

According to the cross-connection level and granularity, electrical cross-connections are classified into, for example, GE, Any, and ODUk cross-connections.

According to the grooming mode, electrical cross-connections are classified into centralized cross-connections and distributed cross-connections.

According to the location of cross-connection, electrical cross-connections can be in straight-through mode or cross-connect mode. − Straight-through mode:

Optical signals received at the RXn port on the client side pass through the cross-connect unit and directly travel to the corresponding channels on the WDM side. After multiplexing, signal processing and optical wavelength conversion, these signals are output from the OUT port. After wavelength conversion and signal processing, signals input from the IN port on the WDM side are demultiplexed into one or more channels of electrical signals that pass through the cross-connect unit and directly travel to the corresponding TXn on the client side. Straight-through services are as shown in the Figure 7-1:

− 3 (RX1/TX1) (client-side optical interfaces) <-> 3 (channel number) − 4 (RX2/TX2) (client-side optical interfaces) <-> 4 (channel number) − 5 (RX3/TX3) (client-side optical interfaces) <-> 5 (channel number) − 6 (RX4/TX4) (client-side optical interfaces) <-> 6 (channel number)

Page 145: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

Figure 7-1 Straight-through mode

3-1(RX1)4-1(RX2)5-1(RX3)6-1(RX4)

1-31-41-51-6

1(OUT)

3-1(TX1)4-1(TX2)5-1(TX3)6-1(TX4)

1-31-41-51-6

1(IN)

A B

− Cross-connect mode: Cross-connections in cross-connect mode are classified into intra-board cross-connections and inter-board cross-connections.

− Intra-board cross-connection: Optical signals received at the RXn port on the client side are cross-connected by the cross-connect unit to the channels that correspond to other optical interfaces of the same board on the WDM side. After multiplexing, signal processing and optical wavelength conversion, these signals are output from the OUT port. After wavelength conversion and signal processing, signals input from the IN port on the WDM side are demultiplexed into multiple channels of electrical signals, one channel of which is cross-connected by the cross-connect unit to the client-side TXn port that corresponds to other channels of the same board. The intra-board cross-connection service is as shown in the Figure 7-2: 5 (RX1/TX1) (client-side optical interfaces) <->3 (channel number).

− Inter-board cross-connection: Optical signals received at the RXn port on the client side are cross-connected by the cross-connect unit to the channels that correspond to optical interfaces of another board on the WDM side. After multiplexing, signal processing and optical wavelength conversion, these signals are output from the OUT port. After wavelength conversion and signal processing, signals input from the IN port on the WDM side are demultiplexed into multiple channels of electrical signals, one channel of which is cross-connected by the cross-connect unit to the client-side TXn port that corresponds to other channels of another board. The Inter-board cross-connection service is as shown in the Figure 7-2: 3 (RX1/TX1) (client-side optical interfaces) <->6 (channel number).

Figure 7-2 Cross-connect mode

3-1(RX1)4-1(RX2)5-1(RX3)6-1(RX4)

1-31-41-51-6

1(OUT)

3-1(TX1)4-1(TX2)5-1(TX3)6-1(TX4)

1-31-41-51-6

1(IN)

A B

3-1(RX1)4-1(RX2)5-1(RX3)6-1(RX4)

1-31-41-51-6

C

Page 146: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

The straight-through and cross-connect services should be configured on the T2000. That is, create cross-connect services.

Restrictions on Cross-Connection Configuration Earlier version NE software does not support cross-connection creation between boards

of different types. As the NE software imposes restrictions on backplane cross-connections, the boards

between which you want to create cross-connections must be in cross-connect slots. In the case of different types of equipment, boards, and the corresponding NE software versions, their cross-connect slots and cross-connect groups are different.

If you configure a cross-connection between the two optical ports on the OTU board, the source of a normal cross-connection can also serve as the source of other normal cross-connections, but its sink cannot be the sink of other cross-connections. The two sources of a SNCP cross-connection cannot be the source of other cross-connections, and its sinks cannot be the sink of other cross-connections.

When configuring the electrical cross-connection for a service on the OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 8800 I, you must make sure that the WDM-side optical channel numbers at the transmit and receive ends of the service in a direction must be the same. Otherwise, the service fails.

The OptiX OSN 3800 provides mesh cross-connections in the four-slot group based on the GE service, ODU1 signal, and Any service.

Normal cross-connections on the OptiX OSN 6800 are classified into centralized cross-connections and distributed cross-connections.

Centralized cross-connection: If the XCS board is configured during the cross-connection creation, the cross-connection can be realized through the XCS. The boards where you want to create cross-connections can be placed in any slots that support the boards. If you want to delete the XCS board on the T2000, first delete the cross-connections that are related to the XCS board.

Distributed cross-connection: If no XCS board is configured during the cross-connection creation, the boards where you want to create cross-connections can be placed in paired slots.

The paired slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 are as follows: 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8, 9 and 10, 11 and 12, 13 and 14, and 15 and 16. The XCS boards are placed in slots 9 and 10.

On the OptiX OSN 8800 I, normal cross-connections support centralized cross-connections only.

Signal Flow of Electrical Cross-Connections In the case of the WDM equipment, the OTU board, tributary board, and line board work together to complete the cross-connect grooming of services. The client services are transmitted from the client side of the WDM equipment, and then modulated to the WDM system for transmission after service grooming and convergence. Figure 7-3 considers the OTU board with the GE/Any and ODUk cross-connection function as an module to describe the signal flow of the electrical cross-connection service of the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 6800.Figure 7-4 considers the OTU board with the ODUk cross-connection function as an module to describe the signal flow of the OTN electrical cross-connection service of the OptiX OSN 8800 I. Figure 7-5 describes the signal flow of the SDH electrical cross-connection service of the OptiX OSN 8800 I.

Page 147: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

Figure 7-3 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections

Tributary boardLine board

OTU board (tributary-and-line-joint board)

L2GE/Anycross-

connection

ODUkcross-

connection

L2processing

Backplanebus

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2IN/OUTOTN

Backplanebus

Opticalmodule

Opticalmodule

The signals are cross-connected in the following process:

1. The optical signals are transmitted to the OTU board through the TX/RX interface and become electrical signals. After the possible L2 processing, the electrical signals are transmitted to the GE/Any cross-connect module through the AP interface and work with the possible cross-connect signals from the backplane, to realize the GE/Any cross-connections.

2. The electrical signals are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect module through the LP interface and work with the possible ODUk signals from the backplane, to realize the ODUk cross-connections. Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OP interface and then added to the WDM line for transmission.

The OptiX OSN 8800 I supports the electrical signals that are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect module through the LP interface and work with the possible ODUk signals from the backplane, to realize the ODUk cross-connections. Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OP interface and added to the WDM line for transmission.

The boards that support the grooming of electrical cross-connections have both the external interfaces and internal interfaces. These interfaces are classified into the following types:

TX/RX interface: client-side optical interface of the board that receives and transmits signals. IP interface: internal interface that corresponds to the TX/RX interface. It can be regarded as a

TX/RX interface. AP interface: convergence interface that represents the internal interface of the L2 module. In this

case, the corresponding IP interface is an external interface. LP: logical interface that functions as the connection point of cross-connections. OP interface: internal interface that corresponds to the IN/OUT interface. It can be regarded as an

IN/OUT interface. IN/OUT interface: line-side optical interface of the board that receives and transmits signals.

Page 148: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Figure 7-4 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections

Tributary boardLine board

OTU board (tributary-and-line-joint board)

ODUkcross-

connection

Backplanebus

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2IN/OUTOTN

Opticalmodule

Opticalmodule

The signals are cross-connected in the following process:

Signals are transmitted to an OTU board or a tributary board through the TX/RX interface and become electrical signals. Then, the electrical signals are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect module, and work with the cross-connect signals that may come from the backplane to realize ODUk cross-connections. After the electrical signals are transmitted to the OTN processing module on the OTU board or a line board, the electrical signals are transmitted to a WDM-side optical module and become the optical signals that have the DWDM standard wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1, and then the optical signals are transmitted to the WDM line for transmission.

Figure 7-5 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections

Tributary boardLine board

VC4/VC3/VC12cross-

connection

Backplanebus

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2IN/OUTSDH

Opticalmodule

Opticalmodule

The signals are cross-connected in the following process:

Signals are transmitted to an SDH board through the TX/RX interface and becomes electrical signals. Then, the electrical signals are transmitted to the VC4/VC3/VC12 cross-connect

Page 149: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

module, and work with the cross-connect signals that may come from the backplane to realize VC–4/VC–3/VC–12 cross-connections. After being transmitted to the SDH processing module on the SDH board, the electrical signals are transmitted to a WDM-side optical module and become the optical signals that have the DWDM standard wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.

7.2 Service Type This topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.

Access Service Table 7-1 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 3800/6800 supports.

Table 7-1 Service access function

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

SDH service, POS service, ATM service

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256

ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.691 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.693

SONET service OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768 GR-253-CORE GR-1377-CORE ANSI T1.105

Ethernet service FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae

SAN service ESCON, FICON, FICON Express, FC50, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC1200

ANSI X3.296 ANSI X3.303

OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU5G, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3

ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.959.1

Video service and others

HDTV, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, SDI, FDDI

EN 50083-9 SMPTE 292M SMPTE 259M

Page 150: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

FE: Fast Ethernet GE: Gigabit Ethernet ESCON: Enterprise systems connection FICON: Fiber connection FC: Fiber channel HDTV: High definition TV DVB-ASI: Digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface DVB-SDI: Digital video broadcasting-serial digital interface SDI: Serial digital interface FDDI: Fiber distributed data interface

Table 7-2 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 8800 I supports.

Table 7-2 Service access function

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

SDH service, POS service, ATM service

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256

ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.691 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.693

SONET service OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768

GR-253-CORE GR-1377-CORE ANSI T1.105

Ethernet service FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae

SAN service ESCON, FICON, FICON Express, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC1200, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ET, CLO, InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G

ANSI X3.296 ANSI X3.303

OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU2e ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.959.1

Video service and others

HDTV, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, FDDI

EN 50083-9 SMPTE 292M SMPTE 259M

Page 151: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

FE: Fast Ethernet GE: Gigabit Ethernet ESCON: Enterprise systems connection FICON: Fiber connection FC: Fiber channel HDTV: High definition TV DVB-ASI: Digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface DVB-SDI: Digital video broadcasting-serial digital interface SDI: Serial digital interface FDDI: Fiber distributed data interface

7.3 WDM Service Configuration Flow This topic describes the configuration process of services. Before configuring the WDM services, complete the basic configurations on the NE following the network creation process.

Page 152: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Figure 7-6 WDM service configuration flow

Start

Configure service type

Create cross-connections or not?

Creating cross-connectservices Non-cross-connect services

Start performance monitoringon the NE

Back up the configuration dataof the NE

End

Y

N

Task Name Description

9.6 Configuring the Service Type

Mandatory The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface of the board is the same as the actual service type.

9.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections

Optional By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for a single service.

Non-cross-connect services

Optional The services at the non-cross-connect port can be available after the service type is configured correctly.

Page 153: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-11

Task Name Description

5.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

Mandatory Performance monitoring keeps a detailed record of the operation of an NE, helping the maintenance engineer to monitor and analyze the operation status of the NE.

9.26 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data

Mandatory Back up the NE configuration database, so that the NE operation can be restored upon a data loss on the SCC board or a power failure in the equipment.

7.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service

This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the GE service through configuration of the cross-connect service.

7.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the GE service in the ring network.

7.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes how to configure the GE service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.

7.4.3 Configuration Process

This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

7.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the GE service in the ring network.

Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure 7-7, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service is available between NE A and NE B.

Page 154: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Figure 7-7 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service

BA

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADM

EAST 12LQMSWEST 12LQMS

EAST 12LQMSWEST 12LQMS

Board Configuration Information In this example, two 12LQMS boards should be configured on each NE.

7.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the GE service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.

One GE service is available between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-8 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-8 Unidirectional service on each NE

A

12LQMS3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX5/TX5)

5(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

B

12LQMS3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX5/TX5)

6(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

: client-side services : WDM-side services : virtual channel

The 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.

Page 155: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13

GE service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE A and 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE A.

GE service of station B: The service is dropped by using the 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE B.

Figure 7-9 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-9 Wavelength allocation diagram

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

1532.68/195.60

A BWestEast

7.4.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

Procedure Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM

interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

Page 156: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type according to the planning.

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close.

Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type according to the planning.

Page 157: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close.

----End

7.5 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services

This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SAN services through an example.

7.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the SAN service in the ring network.

7.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes how to configure the SAN service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.

7.5.3 Configuration Process

This section describes how to configure the SDH service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Page 158: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

7.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the SAN service in the ring network.

Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure 7-10, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional SAN service is available between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-10 Configuration networking diagram of the SAN service

BA

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADM

EAST 12LQMSWEST 12LQMS

EAST 12LQMSWEST 12LQMS

Board Configuration Information In this example, two 12LQMS boards should be configured on each NE.

7.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the SAN service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.

One SAN service is available between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-11 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.

Page 159: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17

Figure 7-11 Unidirectional service on each NE

A

12LQMS3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX5/TX5)

5(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

B

12LQMS3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX5/TX5)

6(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

: client-side services : WDM-side services : virtual channel

The 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.

SAN service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE A and 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE A.

SAN service of station B: The service is dropped by using the 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE B.

Figure 7-12 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-12 Wavelength allocation diagram

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

1532.68/195.60

A BWestEast

7.5.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the SDH service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

Page 160: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

Procedure Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM

interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type according to the planning.

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close.

Page 161: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-19

Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type according to the planning.

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close.

----End

7.6 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service

This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the OTN service through configuration of the cross-connect service.

7.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the OTN service in the ring network.

Page 162: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

7.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes how to configure the OTN service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.

7.6.3 Configuration Process

This section describes how to configure the OTN service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

7.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the OTN service in the ring network.

Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure 7-13, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional OTN service is available between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-13 Configuration networking diagram of the OTN service

BA

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADM

EAST 12LQMSWEST 12LQMS

EAST 12LQMSWEST 12LQMS

Board Configuration Information In this example, two 12LQMS boards should be configured on each NE.

7.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the OTN service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.

Page 163: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-21

One OTN service is available between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-14 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-14 Unidirectional service on each NE

A

12LQMS3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX5/TX5)

5(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

B

12LQMS3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX5/TX5)

6(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

: client-side services : WDM-side services : virtual channel

The 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.

OTN service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE B and 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE B.

OTN service of station B: The service is dropped by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE B and 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE B is used.

Figure 7-15 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-15 Wavelength allocation diagram

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

1532.68/195.60

A BWestEast

7.6.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the OTN service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Page 164: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Precautions

When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

Procedure Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM

interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type according to the planning.

Page 165: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-23

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close.

Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type according to the planning.

Page 166: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close.

----End

7.7 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services

This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SDH services through an example.

7.7.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the SDH service in the ring network.

7.7.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes how to configure the SDH service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.

7.7.3 Configuration Process

This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Page 167: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-25

7.7.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the SDH service in the ring network.

Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure 7-16, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional SDH service is available between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-16 Configuration networking diagram of the SDH service

BA

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADM

EAST 12LQMSWEST 12LQMS

EAST 12LQMSWEST 12LQMS

Board Configuration Information In this example, two 12LQMS boards should be configured on each NE.

7.7.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the SDH service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.

One SDH service is available between NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-17 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.

Page 168: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Figure 7-17 Unidirectional service on each NE

A

12LQMS3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX5/TX5)

5(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

B

12LQMS3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX5/TX5)

6(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

: client-side services : WDM-side services : virtual channel

The 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.

SDH service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE A and 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE A.

SDH service of station B: The service is dropped by using the 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE B.

Figure 7-18 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.

Figure 7-18 Wavelength allocation diagram

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

1532.68/195.60

A BWestEast

7.7.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

Page 169: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-27

When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

Procedure Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM

interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type according to the planning.

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close.

Page 170: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type according to the planning.

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close.

----End

7.8 Parameters Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

7.8.1 Parameters: WDM Cross-Connection Configuration

In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

7.8.2 Parameters: WDM Service Configuration

Page 171: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-29

In this user interface, you can configure WDM services. You can specify ports and timeslots for transmitting and receiving services, and set the client-side service protocol.

7.8.1 Parameters: WDM Cross-Connection Configuration In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

Parameters

Table 7-3 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration

Field Value Description

Level Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

The Level parameter is used to differentiate the service types configured when electrical cross-connections are configured. Click Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Service Type For example, FE, STM-1, FICON

When Level of a new service is set to Any, you can select a specific service type.

Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional. Default: Unidirectional

The Direction parameter indicates the service direction mode when the service cross-connection is configured. It can set to either Unidirectional or Bidirectional. Click Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Source Channel Slot ID-Board Name-Optical Interface ID-Optical Channel ID Default: Null

The Source Channel parameter is used to query the transmit channel of a certain electrical cross-connect service (unidirectional service flow). Click Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection) for more information.

Page 172: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Sink Channel Slot ID - Board Name - Optical Interface ID - Optical Channel ID Default: Null

The Sink Channel parameter is used to query the receive channel of a certain electrical cross-connect service (unidirectional service flow). Click Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Activation Status Active, Inactive The Activation Status parameter is used to display whether the service cross-connection configuration is activated. Click Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Service Origin Create Manually, Intelligently Generate

Displays the mode of creating WDM cross-connections.

Table 7-4 New Service

Field Value Description

Level Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

The Level parameter is used to differentiate the service types configured when electrical cross-connections are configured. Click Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Page 173: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-31

Field Value Description

Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional. Default: Unidirectional

The Direction parameter indicates the service direction mode when the service cross-connection is configured. It can set to either Unidirectional or Bidirectional. Click Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Protection Type SW SNCP, ODUK SNCP, MSSNCP

Specifies the level of the new service.

SNCP Type Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Displays the protection type of the service.

Service Type Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

The Service Type parameter is used to set the type of the services for a port when cross-connections of Any services are configured, to match the type of the actual services. Click Service Type (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

OTN Level When SNCP Type is set to SNC/I: this parameter is invalid

When SNCP Type is set to SNC/N: PM, TCM1, TCM2, TCM3, TCM4, TCM5, TCM6 Default: PM When SNCP Type is set to SNC/S: TCM1, TCM2, TCM3, TCM4, TCM5, TCM6 Default: TCM1

Sets the OTN level.

Page 174: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-Revertive Default: Non-Revertive

Chooses whether the service is switched to the original working path after the failure is eliminated. If you want the service to be switched back to the original working path, select Revertive. If you do not want the service to be switched back then, select Non-Revertive.

WTR Time (s) 300 to 720 Default: 600

Sets the wait-to-restore time. It is the time interval between the time when the working service is detected to be normal after switching and the time when the service is switched back to the working path. You can modify the WTR Time (s) only when the Revertive Mode is Revertive.

Working Channel Hold-Off Time(100ms)

0 to 100 Default: 0

Sets the time interval between the time when the system detects signal degrade and the time when the service switching occurs, in order to avoid repeated switching when the service status is not stable. The switching delay time is in 100 milliseconds. For example, if you enter 5, the delay time is 500 milliseconds.

Protection Channel Hold-Off Time(100ms)

0 to 100 Default: 0

Sets the time interval between the time when the system detects signal degrade and the time when the service switching occurs, in order to avoid repeated switching when the service status is not stable. The switching delay time is in 100 milliseconds. For example, if you enter 5, the delay time is 500 milliseconds.

Page 175: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-33

Field Value Description

SD Enable Status Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled

Sets the SD enabling status.

Source Slot Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

The Source Slot parameter is used to set the ID of the slot where the transmit OTU board is located, which is configured with WDM cross-connections. Click Source Slot (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Source Optical Port - The Source Optical Port parameter is used to configure the transmit optical interface for a certain electrical cross-connect service (unidirectional service flow). Click Source Optical Port (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Source Optical Channel - The Source Optical Channel parameter is used to set the number of the transmit channel in the port on the OTU board with electrical cross-connections.Click Source Optical Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Sink Slot Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.

The Sink Slot parameter is used to set the ID of the slot where the receive OTU board is located, which is configured with WDM cross-connections. Click Sink Slot (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Page 176: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Sink Optical Port - The Sink Optical Port parameter is used to configure the receive optical interface for a certain electrical cross-connect service (unidirectional service flow). Click Sink Optical Port (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Sink Optical Channel - The Sink Optical Channel parameter is used to set the number of the receive channel in the port on the OTU board with electrical cross-connections. Click Sink Optical Channel (WDM Cross-Connection) for more information.

Activate Immediately Active, Inactive Default: Active

Sets whether to immediately activate the cross-connection.

South Port Slot For example: 6-TBE Displays the slot number of the board where the southbound port is located.

South Port For example: 3(RX/TX) Displays the number of the southbound port.

7.8.2 Parameters: WDM Service Configuration In this user interface, you can configure WDM services. You can specify ports and timeslots for transmitting and receiving services, and set the client-side service protocol.

Page 177: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-35

Parameters

Table 7-5 Parameters of WDM services

Field Value Description

Port NE-Slot-Board-Optical Interface-Channel Default: Null

The Port parameter indicates the location of the service timeslots, including the channel, optical interface, board, slot, and NE where the timeslots reside. Click Port (WDM Service) for more information.

Service Type STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768, OTU1, OTU2, Fast Ethernet (FE), Gigabit Ethernet (GE), GE(GFP-T), 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, ESCON, FICON, FICON Express, FC50, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC1200, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, FDDI, HDTV, Any

The Service Type parameter is used to set the type of the services at an optical interface when the cross-connections of any services are configured, to match the type of the actual services. Click Service Type (WDM Services) for more information.

Transmit Timeslot 1 to 16 The Transmit Timeslot parameter is used to select the service timeslots in the transmit direction. Click Service Timeslot (WDM Services) for more information.

Receive Timeslot 1 to 16 The Receive Timeslot parameter is used to select the service timeslots on the receive direction. Click Service Timeslot (WDM Services) for more information.

Service Rate (0.1M) For example: 12500 Displays the current service rate.

Page 178: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

7 Configuring WDM Services OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

7-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Field Value Description

Timeslot Configuration Mode

Automatically Assign, Manual Default: Automatically Assign

You can select the timeslot configuration mode. In the automatic mode, timeslots for transmitting and receiving services cannot be configured. In the manual mode, you need to configured the timeslots for transmitting and receiving services. By default, the automatic mode is selected.

Page 179: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

About This Chapter Only OptiX OSN 6800/3800 support 11TOM board.

8.1 Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

8.2 Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

8.3 Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four channels of OTU1 optical signals.

8.4 Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between seven channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals.

8.5 Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Signal and Realizes the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function on the WDM Side

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals, and how to realize the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

Page 180: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

8.1 Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

8.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

8.1.2 Service Signal Flow

This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

8.1.3 Configuration Process

This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

8.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

Service Requirement Refer to Figure 8-1, the optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the ONEs function as OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. On station A, the TOM board accesses eight Any services (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The ODU1 services are then sent to the NS2 board, where they are converted into one OTU2 service.

Page 181: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

Figure 8-1 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 1

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

EASTNMS

WEST

WEST

EAST

WEST EAST

:OADM

WEST

EAST

12NS211TOM

SLOT212SLOT215

12NS211TOM

SLOT212SLOT215

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TOM board and an NS2 board should be configured on station A and station B.

8.1.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.

Figure 8-2 shows the service signal flow on station A

Page 182: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Figure 8-2 Bidirectional service on station A

A

12NS2

1(IN/OUT)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3

11TOM3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)

204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)

A

: Client-side services

: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel

: Working service direction

8.1.3 Configuration Process This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

The value of Board Mode is Non-cascading mode by default. In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a maximum of two services.

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port. The total rate of services accessed to a ClientLP port must be equal to or lower than 2.5 Gbit/s. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

The client-side interfaces can be grouped as required.

Procedure Step 1 Configure the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM. For details, refer to 9.6

Configuring the Service Type.

Step 2 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TOM board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

Page 183: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

The Service Type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM board

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close. 6. Repeat substep b to substep e to configure the remaining seven Any services.

Step 3 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TOM and NS2 boards.

1. Click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. Set the parameters for the cross-connect service between the TOM and NS2 boards.

Page 184: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

2. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 3. Click Close. 4. Repeat substep a to substep c to the set the parameters for the remaining cross-connect

services between the TOM and NS2 boards.

----End

8.2 Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

8.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

8.2.2 Service Signal Flow

This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

Page 185: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

8.2.3 Configuration Process

This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

8.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

Service Requirement Refer to Figure 8-3, the optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the ONEs function as OADM stations.

User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service separately. On station A, the TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are then sent to two NS2 boards according to the actual service requirement. Each NS2 board converges the received ODU1 services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service.

Figure 8-3 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 2

B

A

C

D

User2

EASTNMS

WEST

WEST

EAST

WEST EAST

:OADM

WEST

EAST

SLOT213SLOT215

12NS211TOM

SLOT213SLOT215

SLOT21212NS211TOM

12NS2

SLOT213SLOT215

12NS211TOM

User1

User3

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TOM board and two NS2 boards should be configured on station A, a TOM board and an NS2 board should be configured on station B and station C.

Page 186: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

8.2.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Another OTU2 service is available between station A and station C.

Figure 8-4 shows the service signal flow on station A

Figure 8-4 Bidirectional service on station A

11TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)

204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)

A

A

12NS2

1(IN/OUT)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3

A

12NS2

1(IN/OUT)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3

: Client-side services

: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel

: Working service direction

8.2.3 Configuration Process This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

Page 187: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

Procedure Step 1 Set Service Mode of the TOM board to OTN Mode.

When the TOM board accesses OTU1 services on the client side, you first need to set the Service Mode of the TOM board to OTN Mode.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list. 3. Click the Service Mode and select OTN Mode from the drop-down list. 4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM as OTU1. For details, refer to 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TOM board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

Page 188: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

The Service Type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM board

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close. 6. Repeat substep b to substep e to configure the remaining three OTU1 services.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TOM and NS2 boards.

1. Click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

Page 189: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

2. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 3. Click Close. 4. Repeat substep a to substep c to the set the parameters for the remaining cross-connect

services between the TOM and NS2 boards.

----End

8.3 Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four channels of OTU1 optical signals.

8.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

8.3.2 Service Signal Flow

Page 190: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

8.3.3 Configuration Process

This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

8.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

Service Requirement Refer to Figure 8-5, the optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the ONEs function as OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 services are available between station A and station B. On station A, the TOM board accesses four FE services and then converts them into four OTU1 services.

Figure 8-5 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 3

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

WESTEASTNMS

EAST

EAST

EASTWEST

WEST

WEST

:OADM

11TOMSLOT214

11TOMSLOT214

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TOM board should be configured on station A and station B.

Page 191: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-13

8.3.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

Four OTU1 service is available between station A and station B.

Figure 8-6 shows the service signal flow on station A

Figure 8-6 Bidirectional service on station A

11TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

A

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)

204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)

: Client-side services

: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel

: Working service direction

8.3.3 Configuration Process This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

When the service type on both the client side and the WDM side of the TOM board is OTU1, the TOM board also can regenerates the OTU1 service.

Page 192: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

When the TOM board functions as a regeneration board, you need to change the Type of the client-side optical interface to Client Side Color Optical Port.

In the cascading mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of one OTU1 signals. In the non-cascading mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 signals.

Procedure Step 1 Set the type of client-side ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7), and 10 (RX8/TX8)

to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, refer to Modifying Port.

When the TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module must be inserted in the WDM-side optical interface, and the Type of this optical interface must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM. For details, refer to 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TOM board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

Page 193: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-15

The Service Type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM board

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close. 6. Repeat substep b to substep e to configure the remaining three Any services.

Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TOM board.

1. Click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

Page 194: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

2. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 3. Click Close. 4. Repeat substep a to substep c to the set the parameters for the remaining three OTU1

services.

----End

8.4 Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between seven channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals.

8.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

8.4.2 Service Signal Flow

Page 195: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-17

This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

8.4.3 Configuration Process

This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

8.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

Service Requirement Refer to Figure 8-7, the optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the ONEs function as OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. On station A, the TOM board accesses seven Any services (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service.

Figure 8-7 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in cascading mode) in application scenario 4

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

WESTEASTNMS

EAST

EAST

EASTWEST

WEST

WEST

:OADM

11TOMSLOT215

11TOMSLOT215

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TOM board should be configured on station A and station B.

Page 196: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

8.4.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

One OTU1 service is available between station A and station B.

Figure 8-8 shows the service signal flow on station A

Figure 8-8 Bidirectional service on station A

11TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

A

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)

204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)

7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

9(RX7/TX7)

205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)

206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)

207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)

: Client-side services

: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel

: Working service direction

8.4.3 Configuration Process This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. And this service can be configured in only the first ClientLP port.

The client-side seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Page 197: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-19

Procedure Step 1 Set Board Mode to Cascading mode.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click By Board/Port(Channel), choose Board from the drop-down list. 3. Click the Board Mode and select Cascading mode from the drop-down list.

If the Board Mode of the board is changed, the default port configuration data and service configuration data will be restored, and as a result the services will be interrupted.

4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Set the type of client-side ports 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, refer to Modifying Port.

When the TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module must be inserted in the WDM-side optical interface, and the Type of this optical interface must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Configure the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM. For details, refer to 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TOM board

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

Page 198: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

The Service Type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM board

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close. 6. Repeat substep b to substep e to configure the remaining six Any services.

Step 5 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TOM board

1. Click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

Page 199: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-21

2. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 3. Click Close. 4. Repeat substep a to substep c to the set the parameters for the remaining three OTU1

services.

----End

8.5 Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Signal and Realizes the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function on the WDM Side

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals, and how to realize the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

8.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

Page 200: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

8.5.2 Service Signal Flow

This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

8.5.3 Configuration Process

This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

8.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.

Service Requirement Refer to Figure 8-9, the optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the ONEs function as OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TOM board accesses six Any services (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. On the WDM side, the TOM board performs dual transmitting and selective receiving.

Figure 8-9 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in cascading mode) in application scenario 4

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

WESTEASTNMS

EAST

EAST

EASTWEST

WEST

WEST

:OADM

11TOMSLOT214

11TOMSLOT214

Page 201: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-23

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TOM board should be configured on station A and station B.

8.5.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transmission signal flow on station A.

One OTU1 service is available between station A and station B.

Figure 8-10 shows the service signal flow on station A

Figure 8-10 Bidirectional service on station A

错误!未指定文件名。

8.5.3 Configuration Process This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. And this service can be configured in only the first ClientLP port.

The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Procedure Step 1 Set Board Mode to Cascading mode.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click By Board/Port(Channel), choose Board from the drop-down list. 3. Click the Board Mode and select Cascading mode from the drop-down list.

If the Board Mode of the board is changed, the default port configuration data and service configuration data will be restored, and as a result the services will be interrupted.

4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Set the type of client-side ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, refer to Modifying Port.

Page 202: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

When the TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module must be inserted in the WDM-side optical interface, and the Type of this optical interface must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Configure the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM. For details, refer to 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 4 onfigure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TOM board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. In the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.For details of the parameters, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Level, , and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

The Service Type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM board

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 5. Click Close. 6. Repeat substep b to substep e to configure the remaining six Any services.

Page 203: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-25

Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TOM board to achieve dual feeding.

1. Click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

Page 204: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

8 Configuring the 11TOM Board OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

8-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

2. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. 3. Click Close.

Step 6 Configure the selective receiving feature for the WDM side of the TOM board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.

2. In the Port Protection user interface, click New. In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK. The Create Protection Group dialog box displayed. Select Intra-Board 1+1 Protection from the Protection Type. Enter the other parameters of the protection group. For details of parameters, refer to Feature Description.

Page 205: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-27

3. Click OK. In the window that is displayed, click Close. The created protection group is

displayed in the window.

----End

Page 206: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)
Page 207: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

9 Tasks

About This Chapter This topic describes basic operations that may be used when you configure services. For example, configure the service type and WDM interface attributes of the board. You can refer to this topic if required.

9.1 Configuring the ROADM

You can configure the ROADM of the WSS type by following the instructions below.

9.2 Configuring Common Cross-Connections

This section describes how to configure common electrical cross-connections.

9.3 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections

This topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections.

9.4 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services

The path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel to maintain the network.

9.5 Configuring Service Timeslots

For some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should be configured during service creation.

9.6 Configuring the Service Type

The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface of the board is the same as the actual service type.

9.7 Configuring Board WDM Interface Attributes

Configure the interface attributes of WDM boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All interface parameters can be queried.

9.8 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes

Configure the interface attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All interface parameters can be queried.

Page 208: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

9.9 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the MCA Board

If the system requires the multi-channel spectrum analyzer (MCA) board, you need to enable the MCA board to monitor wavelengths. The station that is configured with the MCA boards usually uses the MCA boards to check the OSNR of a single wavelength and check whether certain wavelengths are dropped.

9.10 Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board

You can turn on or off a laser by setting the laser status.

9.11 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board

You can turn off or turn on a laser when necessary. For example, if an optical port does not carry services, you can turn off the laser to prevent hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. You can turn on the laser when the optical port needs to carry services.

9.12 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board

You can manually change the rated input and output optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) board as required to trigger a change in the attenuation of the power adjustment board.

9.13 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters

In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition, you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.

9.14 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board

Before using the 52TOM board, you need to configure the board working mode and port working mode for the 52TOM board.

9.15 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs

Before you use OTU boards such as the 11TOM, you need to configure the working modes of the boards.

9.16 Configuring the Service Mode

If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the board.

9.17 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.

9.18 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board

Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.

9.19 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board

Page 209: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.

9.20 Configuring Protection Trigger Conditions

You can set the signal degrade (SD) as the trigger condition of automatic protection switching for the OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800.

9.21 Setting the NULL Mapping Status

Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection. For the channel where no signals are input, the T2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping status to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be monitored.

9.22 Configuring Path Binding

By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower order signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical interface decreases.

9.23 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring

The WMU board is connected to the MON interfaces of the optical amplifier boards or optical multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths and reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To realize the function, the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength locates must be configured on the T2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal.

9.24 Configuring the FEC Function

When configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enable the function and set the FEC type of the current optical interface.

9.25 Enabling and Disabling LPT

When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the WDM-side signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can be monitored.

9.26 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data

For the security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.

9.1 Configuring the ROADM You can configure the ROADM of the WSS type by following the instructions below.

9.1.1 Configuring the Edge Port

An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.

9.1.2 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

Page 210: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.

9.1.3 Creating Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection

The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) that performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the creation of single-board optical cross-connection.

9.1.1 Configuring the Edge Port An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background Information

The line-side ports of the FIU and the OTU do not need this configuration. By default, such a port is a Fixed Edge Ports.

If fiber connection between NEs has been added to a port, the port automatically becomes the edge port of NEs.

If fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs has been added to a port, the port cannot be configured as the edge port of NEs.

Procedure Step 1 Click the NE on the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection

Management from the Function Tree. Select the Edge Port tab.

Step 2 Select the desired port in the Available Edge Ports field. Click to add the port to Selected Edge Ports.

Page 211: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

Step 3 Click Apply. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. Click Close.

If you want to change the selected edge port, select the corresponding port from the Selected Edge

Ports, and then click to add the port to Available Edge Ports.

----End

Page 212: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

9.1.2 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the T2000.

The edge port must be configured.

When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical cross-connection of the single station uses.

Background Information When you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted automatically or manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing board automatically adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, you need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing board. The Auto option is available for the following types of optical cross-connection trails:

Passthrough service, such as OA > WSD9 > WSM9 > OA, OA > WSD9 > RMU9 > OA, and OA > ROAM > ROAM > OA.

Add service, such as OTU > WSM9 > OA, OTU > RMU9 > OA, and OTU > ROAM > OA.

Drop service, such as OA > WSD9 > OTU.

The WSMD4 can be used to replace the WSD9 or the WSM9. OA indicates the optical amplifier boards such as OAU1 and OBU1. The FIU can be added before or after the OA. In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards such as D40, D40V and MR2 can be added between the WSD9 and OTU. In add networking, the multiplexer boards such as M40, M40V and MR2 can be added between the OTU and WSM9.

The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be configured in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar. Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board or on a single station. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is recommended.

Procedure Step 1 Click the NE icon in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical

Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand interface.

Page 213: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

Step 2 Click New. The window is displayed.

Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the Available

Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. The optical cross-connection created in this procedure is unlike any of the three cases that are

previously mentioned. Hence, you can only select Manual for Power Adjustment Mode.

Step 3 Click OK. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. Click Close. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the interface.

----End

9.1.3 Creating Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) that performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the creation of single-board optical cross-connection.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

When creating an optical cross-connection of a board, make sure that the optical cross-connection of the single station where this board resides does not occupy the wavelength that the optical cross-connection of the board uses.

Page 214: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Background Information Single-board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection are independent from each other. The user can create single-board optical cross-connection and configure services based on the planning to realize grooming at the optical layer. However, as for the single-station optical cross-connection, grooming is realized after automatic computation of the equipment. The configuration of single-board optical cross-connection and that of single-station optical cross-connection are mutually exclusive in terms of resources. When the user configures an optical-layer grooming board with the single-board optical cross-connection of one wavelength, this wavelength can no longer be configured for single-station optical cross-connection.

Procedure Step 1 Click the NE icon in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical

Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand interface.

Step 2 Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

Step 3 Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the

Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths.

Page 215: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

Step 4 Click OK. The Create Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. Click Close. The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the interface.

----End

9.2 Configuring Common Cross-Connections This section describes how to configure common electrical cross-connections.

9.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections

By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for a single service.

9.2.2 Activating Cross-Connections

Do as follows to apply cross-connections to a board.

Page 216: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

9.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for a single service.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Context For cross-connect slot limitations, see 7.1 Overview.

When configuring the electrical cross-connection for a service, you must make sure that the WDM-side optical channel numbers at the transmit and receive ends of the service in a direction must be the same. Otherwise, the service fails.

Procedure Step 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDM

interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 9.6 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.For parameter descriptions, see WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

Page 217: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-11

Step 4 Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

Step 5 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

9.2.2 Activating Cross-Connections Do as follows to apply cross-connections to a board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The cross-connections must be created and inactive.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab.

Step 3 Optional: Click Query to query the services on the NE. The Working cross-connection list displays all the created cross-connections.

Page 218: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 4 Select one or more cross-connections in Inactive state (you can press Ctrl or Shift to select multiple cross-connections at the same time), and click Activate. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 6 Click Close. In WDM Cross-Connection Configuration, Activation Status of the selected cross-connection(s) changes from Inactive to Active.

----End

9.3 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections This topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections.

9.3.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity

The lower order cross-connection capacity of the OptiX OSN 8800 I determines the lower order access capability of the equipment. Therefore, when configuring an SDH service, consider whether the lower order cross-connection capacity of the equipment is sufficient.

9.3.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections

To groom SDH services, the SDH service cross-connections between line boards must be created.

9.3.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity The lower order cross-connection capacity of the OptiX OSN 8800 I determines the lower order access capability of the equipment. Therefore, when configuring an SDH service, consider whether the lower order cross-connection capacity of the equipment is sufficient.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Query Low Crossing

Capacity from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click Query.

----End

Page 219: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13

9.3.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections To groom SDH services, the SDH service cross-connections between line boards must be created.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The cross-connect board and the clock board must be configured.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query SDH services from the NE.

Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 4 Click Create and set the required parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. For the meaning of parameters, refer to Error link :help\wdm\com\cfga\tt_wdm_og_1841.xml\help\function\configure\sdh\r_sdhywpzhi_wdm.xml.

If you activate the service immediately, the service configuration data is applied to NEs. If you do not activate the service, the service configuration data is only saved on the T2000.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

Page 220: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

9.4 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services The path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel to maintain the network.

9.4.1 Configuring Trace Byte

The trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with the transmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the same vendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the characters previously specified to ensure successful interconnection.

9.4.2 Configuring C2 Byte

The C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types contained in the VC frame.

9.4.1 Configuring Trace Byte The trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with the transmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the same vendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the characters previously specified to ensure successful interconnection.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

When the cross-connections of the VC3 or VC4 levels are created, you can query or set the trace byte of the VC3 or VC4.

Background Information Trace bytes are used to trace the connection status between the receive end and transmit end. For details, see Trace Byte.

The settings of J0 and J1 bytes must be consistent on the transmit and receive sides; otherwise, J0_MM and HP_TIM are generated at the receive equipment.

Procedure Step 1 Select the type of the trace byte.

If you need to configure

Perform the following operations

J0 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.

Page 221: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-15

If you need to configure

Perform the following operations

J1 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.

In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.

Step 2 Right-click the trace byte and choose the input mode.

If you choose Perform the following operations

Copy All Form Received

Click Copy All Form Received.

Manual Input Click Manual Input and the Please input the overhead byte dialog box is displayed. Choose Byte Mode and Input Mode and enter the value of the trace byte. Click OK.

Choose Copy All Form Received and the contents of the trace byte received are automatically

copied to the table. Choose Manual Input to customize the contents of the trace byte.

Step 3 Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

9.4.2 Configuring C2 Byte The C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types contained in the VC frame.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

The cross-connection must be created on the NE.

Background Information

The C2 byte settings on the transmit and receive ends must be consistent. Otherwise, higher order path signal label mismatch (HP_SLM) alarm may occur on the receive-end equipment.

Procedure Step 1 Select the service level of the C2 byte.

Page 222: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

If the service level of the C2 byte is

Perform the following operations

VC4 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.

VC3 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.

Step 2 Set the values of C2 to be Sent and C2 to be Received.

Step 3 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click OK and a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

9.5 Configuring Service Timeslots For some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should be configured during service creation.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Applies to the TQM, TOM, LQM, LQMD, LOM, LQMS, LDMD, LDM, LDMS.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Configuration

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query the status of configured services for each port on the board.

Step 3 Choose the port, double-click Timeslot Configuration Mode and select Automatically Assign.

When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Manual, you can set parameters, such as Send Timeslots and Receive Timeslots. The format of timeslots can be one of the following two:

1, 2, 3, 4: Indicates that four (1–4) timeslots are used. 1–4: Indicates that four (1–4) timeslots are used.

Please obey the following rules during service configuration:

Page 223: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-17

The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. For each board, the same timeslot in the same direction cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the

transmit end.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

9.6 Configuring the Service Type The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface of the board is the same as the actual service type.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical interface. Double-click the Service Type field and select the required service type.

Page 224: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

9.7 Configuring Board WDM Interface Attributes Configure the interface attributes of WDM boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All interface parameters can be queried.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list. Click Query. The parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the interface.

When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from the perspective of function.

Page 225: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-19

Step 3 Select Basic Attributes, Advanced Attributes tabs. Double-click corresponding parameter fields and refer to WDM Interface to enter or select parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

9.8 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes Configure the interface attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All interface parameters can be queried.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > SDH Interface

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Port from the drop-down list. Click Query. The parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the interface.

When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from the perspective of function.

Step 3 Double-click corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.

Step 5 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

9.9 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the MCA Board If the system requires the multi-channel spectrum analyzer (MCA) board, you need to enable the MCA board to monitor wavelengths. The station that is configured with the MCA boards usually uses the MCA boards to check the OSNR of a single wavelength and check whether certain wavelengths are dropped.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The MCA boards must be configured.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an MCA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from

the Function Tree.

Page 226: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Monitor Wavelength from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the wavelength to be monitored on the board and set Wavelength Monitor Status to Monitor. Click Apply.

Step 4 Select the board that is enabled for wavelength monitoring and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the Function Tree.

Step 5 Set Port Number and select the port to be analyzed.

Step 6 See 4.13.1 Parameters: Laser Spectrum Analysis. In Compensation Power(dBm), enter the optical power compensation value. Then, click Refresh.

The default value is 20 dBm and the range is –10 dBm to 30 dBm.

Step 7 Click Query to start the spectrum analysis. The Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform, and Profile are displayed in the user interface.

Click X-Axis Frequency to specify that the X-axis for the Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform,

and Profile represents the frequency. Click X-Axis Wavelength to specify that the X-axis for the Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform,

and Profile represents the wavelength.

----End

9.10 Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board You can turn on or off a laser by setting the laser status.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The related board must be created.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the By Board/Port(Channel) option button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 In the Basic Attributes tab, double-click the Laser Status field to modify or set the laser status of the optical interface to Open or Close according to the requirement.

Page 227: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-21

Set Laser Status to Close, and click Apply. The Prompt dialog box is displayed. The displayed Prompt telling you that the operation may cause service interruption or NE login failure. You can confirm the settings according to actual service requirement.

When you turn off the laser of the ROPboard, another Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that you can turn off the laser only when the board belongs to an IPA protection pair. Confirm this and click OK.

Set Laser Status to Open, and click Apply.

When you set the Laser Status of the UHBA board to Open, and click Apply, the Prompt dialog box is displayed, and telling you that the operation can cause personal injury. You can confirm the settings according to actual service requirement.

----End

9.11 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board You can turn off or turn on a laser when necessary. For example, if an optical port does not carry services, you can turn off the laser to prevent hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. You can turn on the laser when the optical port needs to carry services.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The related board must be created.

Context

If you turn off a laser, services may be interrupted or you may fail to log in to certain NEs.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the

Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Double-click Laser Switch and set the laser status of each port to Open or Close as required.

Step 4 Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.

Step 5 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

Page 228: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

9.12 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board You can manually change the rated input and output optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) board as required to trigger a change in the attenuation of the power adjustment board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an OAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from

the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The rated optical power value of the receive port is displayed.

Step 2 Double-click the Rated Optical Power (dBm) fields of the input and output interfaces, and enter values.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

9.13 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition, you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Applicable to the LSXL, LSXLR, TDC, NS3 boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I.

Precaution

This operation may interrupt services.

Procedure Search the best dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board.

Page 229: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-23

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion Compensation from the Function Tree.

2. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation parameter. 3. Select the port, click Start Search. The search status changes to Searching. After

successful search, the search status changes to The search is successful.

After successful search, only the search status automatically changes. Other parameters do not

change until you query them. If you start searching the best value, you cannot set the dispersion compensation value.

4. Click Query. After confirmation, you can query the best dispersion compensation value. 5. Optional: Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.

After you enable the fine tune switch, the board may be fine tuned and the query result of the dispersion compensation value may change.

6. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration. Manually set the dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the

baord. 1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion

Compensation from the Function Tree. 2. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation parameter. 3. Set Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) and Fine Tune Switch.

The dispersion compensation value must be in the range of the dispersion compensation range. The dispersion compensation value and the best dispersion compensation value can be fine tuned

only if they are in the fine tune range.

4. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.

----End

9.14 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs Before you use OTU boards such as the 11TOM, you need to configure the working modes of the boards.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The necessary OTU boards must be created.

Applies to the 11TOM 12LQMS and 12ND2 boards.

Page 230: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), Select Board from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the desired port on the board, and then double-click Board Mode to choose the desired port working mode from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

9.15 Configuring the Service Mode If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applicable boards: 11TOM, 12LQMD, 12LQMS, 12TQM, 13LQM, and 52TOM.

Precautions

Modifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical interface. Double-click the Service Mode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

9.16 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC) The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.

Page 231: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-25

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Service Type of the board on the client side must be set to ISC1G or ISC2G.

Applies to TN12TQM, TN12LQMS, TN12LQMD, TN11LOM and TN13LQM board.

Precautions

Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. The OFC function cannot coexist with protection.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab. Double-click the OFC Enabled field, and select Enabled.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

9.17 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board

Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The OTU board must be created.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree. Select the By Function option button.

Page 232: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Step 2 Select Automatic Laser Shutdown from the drop-down list. Click Query and the attribute of Automatic Laser Shutdown for the port or channel are shown in the window.

Step 3 Select an optical interface and set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Enabled.

Step 4 Click Apply.

The displayed Prompt telling you that the operation may cause service interruption or NE login failure. You can confirm the settings according to actual service requirement.

Step 5 When you click OK. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

9.18 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The optical interface board must be created.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Set the On Period (ms), Off Period (ms) and Continuously On-test Period (ms).

Step 3 When you click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

9.19 Configuring Protection Trigger Conditions You can set the signal degrade (SD) as the trigger condition of automatic protection switching for the OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The OTU board must be applicable to the OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800.

Page 233: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-27

The following OTU boards are not supported: 11LSXLR, 11TBE, 11ECOM, 11LSXR, 11ND2, 11NS3, 51NQ2, 12LSXLR, 12NS2, 12TMX and 12ND2.

Context The following protection trigger conditions are supported: B1_SD, OTUk_DEG and ODUk_PM_DEG.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired OTU board and then choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Step 4 Double-click the SD Trigger Condition cell that you want to set. In the SD Trigger Condition dialog box, select one or more options and then click OK.

After the configuration of the parameters for the SD trigger condition of automatic protection switching, the switching will enable when a selected alarm happens.

The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that regenerator section B1 signals in the received signals are degraded. This alarm occurs, when the processing board detects the B1 byte, indicating that the bit error rate of the regenerator section signals exceeds the specified threshold value.

The OTUk_DEG is an alarm indicating that OTUk signal degraded. This alarm occurs when bit errors are of burst distribution and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the threshold. When bit errors are of Poisson distribution, if signals degrade this alarm occurs; if the bit error count crosses the threshold, an OTUk_EXC alarm occurs.

The ODUk_PM_DEG is an alarm indicating that ODUk PM signal degraded. This alarm occurs when the BIP8 detection mode is bursty mode and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the threshold.

Step 5 Click Apply in the lower right corner.

----End

Page 234: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

9.20 Setting the NULL Mapping Status Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection. For the channel where no signals are input, the T2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping status to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be monitored.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The following OTU boards or tributary boards and line boards must be configured: LQMS, LQMD, LSX, NS2, LOG , TMX , NQ2, NS3 and LSXL.

Precaution

The PRBS test and the NULL mapping test cannot be performed at the same time.

Context Figure 10-1 shows the common networking mode for NULL mapping detection.

Figure 9-1 Networking diagram for NULL mapping test

NULLTransmit

end

NULLReceive

endWDM network

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click the NULL Mapping Status and select Enabled.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Start the NE Explorer of the opposite NE. Select a board and choose Configuration > OTN Overhead Management > OPU Overhead.

Step 6 Check if the value of PT Received is the same as the PT to be received.

----End

Page 235: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-29

9.21 Configuring Path Binding By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower order signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical interface decreases.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Applies to the TDX board.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Path Binding from the

Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Configure, and the Configure Path Binding dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Configure relevant information of the path binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, and Direction. For details, refer to 4.13.11 Parameters: Path Binding.

For the bound path, ODU1-1 is required. If you want to select other paths as the bound path, you must select paths in the order from ODU1-2 to ODU1-4 according to the actual service situation.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

9.22 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring The WMU board is connected to the MON interfaces of the optical amplifier boards or optical multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths and reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To realize the function, the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength locates must be configured on the T2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The WMU board must be created after the physical WMU board is installed.

Background Information When configuring the wavelength monitoring, check the transmit directions of each OTU board and the fiber connections. In addition, check which optical interface on the WMU board is connected. Based on the check result, configure the optical interfaces on the WMU board and the wavelength monitoring of the OTU board.

The WMU boards of NG WDM series equipment can monitor OTUs only in the same subrack.

Page 236: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

For details about the centralized wavelength monitoring function of the WMU board, see the Hardware Description.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the WMU board and choose Configuration > Wavelength

Monitoring Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Wavelength Monitoring Unit field, and choose an optical interface of the WMU board from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Click Query, and the information about the wavelength monitoring that has been configured is displayed.

See 4.13.2 Parameters: Wavelength Monitoring Management to query and enter the parameters.

Step 4 Click New, and the New Monitored Object dialog box is displayed. Select the NE and the OTU board where the wavelengths to be detected locate.

Click New, and then the system displays all the OTU boards that are not configured with wavelength monitoring but support wavelength monitoring.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 A prompt appears to indicate that the operation was successful. Click Close. The wavelength monitoring that has been created is displayed in the user interface.

If the logical fiber connections are configured, click Calculate OTU. The system calculates all the

OTU boards that have been logically connected based on the fiber connection relation. Click Apply so that the wavelength monitoring configuration of the OTU boards is delivered.

After you click Calculate OTU, if some of the displayed boards do not need wavelength monitoring, click Delete to remove them one by one.

----End

9.23 Configuring the FEC Function When configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enable the function and set the FEC type of the current optical interface.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The corresponding OTU units must be created.

Page 237: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-31

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button and select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click FEC Working State and FEC Type fields, and select an appropriate value.

After changing the service type on the board, you need to check whether FEC Type is correct on the T2000.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

9.24 Enabling and Disabling LPT When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the WDM-side signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can be monitored.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The corresponding OTU units must be created.

The services on the boards must be normal and must be of no protection.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Enable or disable the LPT.

To enable the LPT, select the desired , double-click LPT Enabled, and choose Enabled from the shortcut menu. Click Apply.

To disable the LPT, select the desired , double-click LPT Enabled, and choose Disabled from the shortcut menu. Click Apply.

----End

Page 238: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

9.25 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data For the security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.

9.26.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods

You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as required.

9.26.2 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board

You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data loss or equipment power failure. When you back up the NE database to the SCC board, you actually back up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the Flash database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues the configuration to the boards.

9.26.3 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to a CF card manually, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after the data in the DRDB database is lost on the SCC board or a power failure occurs on the equipment.

9.26.4 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client

This operation describes how to backup device data manually for multiple device(s) of same device type. You can backup device data to the NMS server or the NMS client.

9.26.5 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board

When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCC board.

9.26.6 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card

When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up on the CF card.

9.26.7 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client

This operation describes how to recover the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.

9.25.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as required.

Page 239: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-33

Comparison of Backup and Restoration Methods The locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board, CF card, local server and remote server. Different storage locations determine different types of backup and restoration methods. See Table 10-1.

Table 9-1 Backup and restoration methods and application scenarios

Backup and Restoration Method Application Scenario

Back up/Restore the NE database to/from an SCC board

Backs up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the flash database, when the SCC board does not have a CF card. During the restoration, after a warm reset or a cold reset on the SCC board, the SCC board reads the configuration from the flash database and issues the configuration to other boards.

Back up/Restore the NE database to/from a CF card

Backs up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the CF card, when the SCC board has a CF card. During the restoration, the database is restored from the CF card to the DRDB database of the SCC board. After a warm reset or cold reset on the SCC board, the memory database on the SCC board is updated. Then, after the warm resets on other boards, the NE memory data is issued to the boards.

Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS server

Stores the data in the computer where the NMS server resides. During restoration, you can select the backup file in the directory where the NE data is saved.

Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS client

Stores the data in the computer where the NMS client resides. During restoration, you can select the backup file in the directory where the NE data is saved.

NE Database The NE configuration data is saved in the NE database. There are three types of NE databases as follows:

MDB: Memory database. The data in a MDB database is changed when the configuration information is changed. The data is lost when the SCC board is reset or a power failure occurs.

Page 240: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

DRDB: Dynamic random database. The data that is verified is automatically saved in the DRDB database.

FDB: Flash database. There are the FDB0 and FDB1 databases. The data need to be copied to the database manually and can be saved permanently.

When the NE configuration data is issued to the SCC board, it is saved in the MDB database. If the verification is successful, the SCC board automatically copies the contents in the MDB database to the DRDB database and issues the verified configuration data to the boards. You need to manually copy the DRDB database to the FDB database, as a backup of the DRDB database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board checks whether there is configuration data in the DRDB database. If yes, the data are restored from the DRDB database. If the data in the DRDB database is damaged, the data is restored from the FDB0 and FDB1 databases.

NE Configuration Data The NE configuration data refers to the information in the DRDB database of the NE, such as the board configuration, clock configuration and protection relations of the NE. It is the instruction file of the NE and the key for the NE to perform normally in the entire network.

NE Database Package The NE database package is a package that contains all database files on an NE and a file list that defines and manages those files.

The NE database package and NE configuration data are the same data on the NE in different releases. You can perform the NE database package backup and restoration on the release 5.00.06 NE or the NE of later release.

9.25.2 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data loss or equipment power failure. When you back up the NE database to the SCC board, you actually back up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the Flash database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues the configuration to the boards.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.

Procedure Step 1 In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management.

Step 2 In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click .

Step 3 In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs.

Step 4 Choose Back Up NE Data > Back Up Database to SCC.

Step 5 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

Page 241: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-35

Step 6 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. After the backup is successful, click Close.

----End

9.25.3 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to a CF card manually, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after the data in the DRDB database is lost on the SCC board or a power failure occurs on the equipment.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must have logged in to the NE as an NE user with "System Level" authority. The SCC board must be configured with the CF card.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Object Tree, select an NE and click .

Step 3 Select one or more NEs in the Configuration Data Management List.

Step 4 Click and then choose .

Step 5 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

Step 6 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

----End

9.25.4 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client

This operation describes how to backup device data manually for multiple device(s) of same device type. You can backup device data to the NMS server or the NMS client.

Prerequisite The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.

Background Information Backup operation can be performed only for multiple devices of same device type. On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the devices and the device type

versions related to the device type is displayed in the Device View table. The files backed up from the server can be viewed in the Backup Information tab.

Page 242: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

Procedure Step 1 Select Data Center > Device Operation from the main menu to open the Device View

table.

Step 2 Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the Device View table.

The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.

Step 3 Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog.

Step 4 Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information.

By default the NMS Server is selected. If the NMS Server is selected, the selected device information is stored on the NMS server.

Step 5 Optional: If the NMS Client is selected, click to select the location where the device data have to be backed up.

Step 6 Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s).

----End

9.25.5 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCC board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority. The NE data from DRDB Database must be backed up to Flash database on the SCC

board.

Page 243: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-37

Procedure Step 1 Double-click ONE on the Main Topology and the Slot Layout is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click the active SCC board, choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset.

The reset modes for different SCC board are different. You need to choose the reset mode as

required. When you choose Cold Reset, the Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the reset.

Step 3 A dialog box is displayed. Click OK to complete the reset.

----End

9.25.6 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up on the CF card.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE or network operator" authority or higher. You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority. The SCC card must be with a CF card and the NE data from DRDB database must be

backed up to the CF card.

Procedure Step 1 In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management.

Step 2 In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click .

Step 3 In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs.

Step 4 Click Restore NE Database. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the restoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption.

Step 5 Click OK to start to restore the NE database.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

Postrequisite After the NE database is restored, the database on the CF card is restored to the DRDB database of the SCC board, but not issued to the boards. If you want to restore the configuration data of the boards, you need to perform a warm reset on the SCC board. Then, perform warm resets on other boards. During the reset of the boards, the NE issues the configuration data to the boards again.

Page 244: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

9 Tasks OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

9-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

9.25.7 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client

This operation describes how to recover the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.

Prerequisite The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started. To perform the Recover operation from client, the SFTP server must be configured, and

the SFTP service is started.

Background Information You cannot perform the Recover operation for multiple devices of different device types. On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the device information related to the

device type is displayed in the Device View table.

Procedure Step 1 Select Data Center > Device Operation from the main menu to open the Device View

table.

Step 2 Right click the device(s) that you want to recover in the Device View table.

Step 3 Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog.

Step 4 Select the backup folder to be recovered from the File Name drop-down list. If the backup folders are not listed in the File Name drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backup folder to be recovered in the Select File dialog , as shown below.

Page 245: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide 9 Tasks

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-39

Step 5 Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to recover the backup folder for the selected device(s). By default the NMS Server is selected.

If the NMS Server is selected, select the backup folder to be recovered from the NMS Server. The selected backup folder path is displayed in the Select File dialog.

If the NMS Client is selected, click to select the backup folder to be recovered from the NMS Client. The selected backup folder path is displayed in the following Selected File dialog.

Step 6 Click OK.

The selected backup folder path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name drop-down list.

Step 7 Click Start, the Operation Confirmation dialog is displayed. Click Yes to start the recover operation.

----End

Result After recovered the device data, right click the device in the Device View table, Select Activation Database... to open the Activation Database dialog, click Start to active the device database.

If you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully complete, the T2000 automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration operation.

Page 246: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)
Page 247: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide A Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

A Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

ADM Add and Drop Multiplexer

AFEC Advanced Forward Error Correction

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

ASON Automatic Switched Optical Network

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

C

CAR Committed Access Rate

CoS Class of Service

CPU Central Processing Unit

CSES Continuous Severely Errored Second

D

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN Data Communication Network

DWDM Dense Wave Division Multiplexer

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection

Page 248: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

A Acronyms and Abbreviations OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

F

FEC Forward error correction

FICON Fiber Connection

FOADM Fixed Optical add/drop Multiplexer

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

H

HDTV High Definition TV

I

ID Identity

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IP Internet Protocol

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Sector

L

LAN Local Area Network

LCN Local Communication Network

LCT Local Craft Terminal

M

MIB Management Information Base

N

NE Network Element

NM Network Management

NRZ Non Return to Zero

NSAP Network Service Access Point

Page 249: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800 Configuration Guide A Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 21 (2009-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

O

OA Optical Amplifier

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance

ODUk Optical Channel Data Unit-k

OLA Optical Line Amplifier

OLP Optical Line Protection

OMS Optical multiplex section

OPU Optical Channel Payload Unit

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel

OSI Open Systems Interconnection

OSN Optical Switch Node

OSNR Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio

OTM Optical Transport Module

OTN Optical Transmission Network

OTU Optical Transponder Unit

P

PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence

Q

QoS Quality of Service

R

RDI Remote Defect Indication

ROADM Reconfiguration Optical Add/drop Multiplexer

RS Reed-Solomon

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

S

SAN Storage Area Network

Page 250: 115108461 OTC107204 OptiX NG WDM Configuration Guide ISSUE 1 00 (1)

A Acronyms and Abbreviations OptiX OSN 8800 I/6800/3800

Configuration Guide

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 21 (2009-08-10)

SCC System Control & Communication

SD Signal Degrade

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SF Signal Fail

SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol

SLM Single Longitudinal Mode

SM Section Monitoring

SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SONET Synchronous Optical Network

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

U

TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring

U

UAT Unavailable Time

UNI User to Network Interface

V

VC Virtual Container

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

W

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex

WSS Wavelength Selective Switch